15 200 52s2

Passport 15000, 20000
Hardware Description
241-1501-200
Passport 15000, 20000
Publication: 241-1501-200
Document status: Standard
Document version: 5.2S2
Document date: Februrary 2004
Copyright 2004 Nortel Networks.

All Rights Reserved.
Printed in Canada
NORTEL NETWORKS, the globemark design, the NORTEL NETWORKS corporate logo, DMS,
and Passport are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
ADC is a registered trademark of ADC Telecommunications, Inc.
AMP, MATE-N-LOK, and Z-PACK are trademarks of Tyco Electronics of Canada, Ltd.
Astec, Helios, MFA150, and Advanced Power Systems are trademarks of Astec Advanced power
Systems.
VT100 is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
Publication history
March 2004
5.2S2 Standard
General availability. Contains information on Passport 15000 and
Passport 20000 for the PCR5.2 release.
Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Description
5.2S2
Publication history
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Contents
About this document
27
Who should read this document and why 27

What you need to know 27
Whats new in this document 28
Structural changes 31
16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FP with PEC NTHW44 33
An additional version of the lower and upper cooling units 33
Enclosing a NEBS 2000 frame with doors and side panels 34
Voice services processor 3 with optical TDM interface
(2pOC3ChSmIrVsp3) 34
Y-protection for dual 16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FPs 34
Related documents 34
How to get more help 35
Chapter 1
Introducing Passport 15000 or 20000 hardware
37
Passport 15000 overview 37

Passport 15000-VSS overview 40
Passport 20000 overview 42
Passport 15000 and 20000 switch architecture 44
Frame assembly overview 46
Breaker interface panel overview 46
Shelf assembly overview 46
Control and function processors overview 47
Upgrading processor cards 47
Cables and cable management overview 48
Peripheral interworking equipment 48
5.2S2
8 Contents
Passport 15000 or 20000 equipment status 48

Hardware parts that can be replaced or upgraded 49
Chapter 2
Breaker interface panel
Front cover of the BIP 53
Breaker interface modules (BIMs) 54
BIP with two or four BIMs 54
Location of the BIMs 55
Functions of the BIMs 55
BIMs distributing power to PIMs 56
Combined BIM pairs in a BIP 60
Front panel of a BIM 60
BIM power filters 61
BIM filler plates 62
Alarm module 62
Location of the BIP alarm module 62
Functions of the BIP alarm module 62
Front panel of the BIP alarm module 63
Hardware alarm definitions 66
BIP alarm LED board 67
Alarm cable connectors 68
Location of the BIP alarm connectors 68
Functions of the BIP alarm connectors 70
Features of the BIP alarm connectors 70
BIP alarm connections from a system of ac rectifiers 71
Power connections to and from the BIP backplane 73
Location of the BIP backplane power connections 73
Function of the BIP backplane power input connections 74
Hardware for connecting power input cables to the BIP 75
Using an optional power-and-ground assembly 76
Function of the BIP backplane power output connections 79
Sources of dc input power to the BIP backplane 83
Powering the BIP from ac rectifiers 83
Grounding the Passport and interworking equipment 85
241-1501-200 5.2S2
51
Contents 9
Chapter 3
Shelf assembly
87
Common backplane 92
Backplane location and physical description 92
Function of the common backplane 93
Fabric cards 94
Fabric card carrier 94
Fabric card transportation 97
Fabric card location and physical description 98
Function and operation of the fabric cards 101
Fabric LED behavior is different from FPs 104
Fabric replacement can affect traffic 104
Fabric replacement can affect system cooling 105
Fabric replacement may need a firmware upgrade 106
Power interface modules (PIMs) 107
Location and physical description of the PIMs 107
PIM faceplate 107
Power LED status indicators for PIMs 110
PIM cable assembly 110
Media access control (MAC) address module 112
Alarm/BITS module 114
Types of alarm/BITS modules 115
Alarm/BITS module faceplate 116
Alarm/BITS module cable assemblies 122
Timing cable specifications for the DS1 circuit 123
Timing cable specifications for the E1 balanced circuit 123
Timing cable specifications for the E1 unbalanced circuit 124
Line build out application settings 125
Cooling units 126
Environmental control equipment 129
The impact of heat dissipation on rising shelf temperatures 131
Fans 133
Fan controllers 133
Air filters 133
Temperature sensors 134
5.2S2
10 Contents
Cooling unit LED indications 134

Cooling unit connections 135
NEBS 2000 frame enclosure 137
Enclosing the frame with doors and extended side panels 137
Enclosing the frame with regular side panels and frame cover
panels 139
Chapter 4
Control and function processors
141
Connecting a Passport to another node 142

Connecting two Passports 143
Connecting nodes in a Passport 15000-VSS 143
Connecting a Passport 15000 or 20000 to a Shasta 5000 144
Connecting a Passport 15000 or 20000 to an EdgeLink 100 144
Blank processor card 146
Control processors 148
CP hardware 152
CP software requirements 152
CP cables 153
Ethernet CP pinout and signal names 158
V.24 CP pinout and signal names 158
CP line rate 159
CP compliance with standards 159
Ethernet compliance with standards 159
2-port DS3Ch TDM FP 160
2-port DS3Ch TDM line connections 162
2-port DS3Ch TDM cable assemblies 162
Assigning sparing panel connections for 2-port DS3C TDM
FPs 164
4-port DS3Ch FR FP 166
4-port DS3 FR FP line connections 167
4-port DS3 FR FP cable assemblies 168
Assigning sparing panel connections for 4-port DS3 FPs 171
4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with IMA 175
4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with IMA line connections 176
4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with IMA cable assemblies 176
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Contents 11
4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES 180

4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES line connections 181
4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES cable assemblies 181
12-port DS3 FP 185
12-port DS3 FP line connections 187
12-port DS3 FP cable assemblies 187
Assigning sparing panel connections for a 12-port DS3 or E3
FP 192
12-port E3 ATM FP 195
12-port E3 FP line connections 197
12-port E3 FP cable assemblies 197
2-port general processor with disk 202
2-port GPDsk components 203
2-port GPDsk pinout and signal names 204
100BaseT Ethernet cable assembly 204
4-port Gigabit Ethernet FP 205
4-port Gigabit Ethernet cable assemblies 206
Custom-making an LC cable assembly for an NTHW49 207
SFP modules for an NTHW49 208
32-port E1 TDM FP 209
32-port E1 TDM line connections 211
32-port E1 TDM cable assemblies 211
Assigning sparing panel connections for 32-port E1 TDM FPs 213
6-module packet server FP 215
6mPktServSP components 217
6mPktServSP sparing 217
6mPktServSP configuration 217
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FPs 218
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP cable assembly 220
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP optical interface characteristics 220
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP 223
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP cable assembly 225
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP optical interface
characteristics 225
16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP with MT-RJ connectors 227
5.2S2
12 Contents
Cable assemblies for an NTHW21 229

Optical interface characteristics for an NTHW21 229
16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP with LC connectors 231
Cable specifications for custom-making LC cable assemblies 233
16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FP 238
SFP modules for an NTHW44 240
Cable specifications for custom-making LC cable assemblies 244
Specifications for Y-splitter cable assemblies for Y-protection 246
1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP 250
1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP cable assembly 252
1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP optical interface characteristics 252
4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM FP 254
4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM FP cable assembly 256
4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM FP optical interface characteristics 256
1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP with APS 258
1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP with APS cable assembly 260
1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP with APS optical interface
characteristics 260
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP 262
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP cable assembly 263
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP optical interface
characteristics 264
1-port STM-1Ch FP 266
1-port STM-1 FP cable assembly 267
1-port STM-1 FP optical interface characteristics 267
VPN extender card 269
VpnXc components 271
VpnXc configuration 271
VpnXc sparing 271
VpnXc compliance with standards 272
Voice services processor 2 (VSP2) FP 273
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Contents 13
Voice services processor 3 (VSP3) FP 274

VSP3 line connections 275
VSP3 cable assemblies 276
VSP3 sparing 278
Equipment to interface VSP3 Ethernet ports 278
Voice services processor 3 with optical TDM interface (VSP3-o)
FP 283
VSP3-o FP line connections 284
VSP3-o FP cable assembly 285
SFP optical module 288
SFP optical module cable assemblies 290
Optical module compliances 290
Chapter 5
Termination panels for FPs
291
Basic functionality and operation of a sparing panel 292

Common characteristics of a sparing panel 294
Power source of a sparing panel 295
Basic functionality and operation of a fanout panel 296
12-port DS3 or E3 fanout panel NTHW52 297
Assigning the fanout panel cable connections 298
Assigning 12-port DS3 or E3 fanout panel connections 299
12-port DS3 or E3 sparing panel NTQS31 300
Testing a transmit port on the NTQS31 303
4-port DS3 sparing panel NTHR79 304
3-port DS3, E3, or E1 sparing panel NTFP99AA 306
Multiport aggregate device for a 32-port E1 TDM 308
Multiport aggregate device connections and cabling 310
Multiport aggregate device power and grounding
requirements 311
Multiport aggregate device LEDs 311
Multiport aggregate device alarms 312
Dimensions of the termination panels 313
Chapter 6
Cables and cable management
315
Managing power cables 315

5.2S2
14 Contents
Managing telecom cables 315

Basic cable management brackets for low-density cabling 316
Cable management brackets for high-density cabling 319
High-density cable management brackets 320
Very high-density cable management brackets 321
Hardware to manage fiber cable slack near the switch 326
Location of specific FP cables in a bundle 328
Cabling a card with or without a termination panel 330
Preparing OC or STM fiber distribution cables 331
LC fiber cables and connectors 332
MT-RJ fiber cables and connectors 333
Preparing coax distribution cables 335
Preparing control port cables 338
Handling alarm cables 340
Prefabricated DS3 or E3 cable assemblies 340
Chapter 7
Using status indicator LEDs and sounds
Follow-me LEDs 344
What to do when a lit red LED is detected 344
What to do when a lit amber LED is detected 345
Hierarchy of LEDs and sounds 345
Status LEDs of a BIP alarm module 346
Testing the LEDs 347
Status LEDs of a BIM 349
Status LEDs of a PIM 350
Status LEDs of a fabric 352
Status LEDs of a fabric in a Passport 15000 352
Status LEDs of a fabric in a Passport 20000 354
Status LEDs of a CP or an FP card 356
Status LEDs of a CP 357
Status LEDs of an FP 358
Status LEDs of the Ethernet ports on an NTHW49 359
Status LEDs of a cooling unit fan 362
Status LEDs of a sparing panel 365
241-1501-200 5.2S2
343
Contents 15
Turning off the audible alarm 366
Chapter 8
Field replaceable units
367
FRUs that plug into or get screwed onto a Passport 15000 or

20000 368
FP cards, SFP modules, and termination panels 370
Control processor (CP) cards 372
FRUs for an MFA150 system of ac rectifiers 385
5.2S2
16 Contents
List of figures
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 8
Figure 9
Figure 10
Figure 11
Figure 12
Figure 13
Figure 14
Figure 15
Figure 16
Figure 17
Figure 18
Figure 19
Figure 20
Figure 21
Figure 22
Figure 23
Figure 24
Figure 25
Figure 26
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Two Passport 15000 switches or two Passport 20000

switches in a NEBS 2000 frame 39
A Passport 15000-VSS in a NEBS 2000 frame 41
Passport 15000 and 20000 switch architecture 45
The BIP in a NEBS 2000 frame, front view 52
Rear of the BIP 53
Relationship between feeds, breakers, and equipment
slots in upper shelf 57
Relationship between feeds, breakers, and equipment
slots in lower shelf 58
Cable paths of PIMs at the rear of a NEBS 2000
frame 59
Alarm module of the BIP 65
Location of alarm cable connectors for two shelves 69
The polyvalent power-and-ground assembly
A0834143 78
The ETSI power-and-ground assembly A0834149 79
Backplane connections at the BIP 81
Location of power output cable connectors at rear of two
shelves 82
MFA150 power system of five rectifiers for a dual shelf
configuration 84
A typical shelf assembly, front view 89
A shelf assembly of a Passport 15000 without fabrics,
rear view 90
A shelf assembly of a Passport 20000 with one fabric
removed, rear view 91
Faceplates of both fabrics installed in a lower
Passport 15000 95
Faceplates of both fabrics installed in a lower
Passport 20000 96
Transportation strap of a Passport 20000 fabric 98
Passport fabric cell 103
Faceplate of a PIM on a Passport 15000 109
Location of the PIMs, the MAC address, and the alarm/
BITS module in a Passport 20000 111
Faceplate of a MAC address module 113
Faceplate of an alarm/BITS module in a
Passport 15000 117
Contents 17
Figure 27
Figure 28
Figure 29
Figure 30
Figure 31
Figure 32
Figure 33
Figure 34
Figure 35
Figure 36
Figure 37
Figure 38
Figure 39
Figure 40
Figure 41
Figure 42
Figure 43
Figure 44
Figure 45
Figure 46
Figure 47
Figure 48
Figure 49
Faceplate of an alarm/BITS module in a

Passport 20000 118
Parts inside a lower cooling unit NTHR51AA (bottom
shown upside down) 127
Parts inside a lower cooling unit NTHR51AB (bottom
shown upside down) 128
Upper and lower cooling unit in a frame with air flow
direction 130
External cooling unit cable connections 136
Installed extended side panels with a door 138
Installed side panels with front and rear frame cover
panels 140
Faceplate of a blank processor card with PEC
NTHR64 147
Faceplate of a CP2 with PEC NTHR06 or NTHR35 150
Faceplate of a CP3 with PEC NTHW06 or
NTHW08 151
CP2 Ethernet cable NT0460 156
CP2 Ethernet crossover cable NT0477 with RJ-45
connectors and ferrite bead 157
Faceplate of a 2-port DS3Ch TDM FP with PEC
NTHW91 161
Cable connections between 2-port DS3C TDM FPs and
a 3-port sparing panel NTFP99 165
Faceplate of a 4-port DS3Ch FR FP with PEC NTHW88
or NTHW89 167
Labels of mini-coax and BNC cable connections on a
4-port NTHR58 cable assembly 170
8W8-to-BNC cable connections between two 4-port
DS3s and sparing panel NTHR79 172
Cable connections between seven 4-port DS3s each
with 8W8s and sparing panel NTQS31 174
Faceplate of a 4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with PEC
NTHR31 175
Faceplate of a 4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES with
PEC NTHR91 180
Faceplate of a 12-port DS3 FP with PEC NTHR23 186
5.2S2
18 Contents
Figure 50
Figure 51
Figure 52
Figure 53
Figure 54
Figure 55
Figure 56
Figure 57
Figure 58
Figure 59
Figure 60
Figure 61
Figure 62
Figure 63
Figure 64
Figure 65
Figure 66
Figure 67
Figure 68
Figure 69
Figure 70
Figure 71
Figure 72
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Port mappings of the 8W8 cable connections of a
12-port DS3 or E3 FP 193
Faceplate of a 12-port E3 FP with PEC NTHR25 196
Faceplate of a 2-port GPDsk with PEC NTHW10 203
Faceplate of a 4-port Gigabit Ethernet FP with PEC
NTHW49 206
Faceplate of a 32-port E1 TDM with PEC NTHW92 210
Cable connections between two 32-port E1 TDM FPs
and a 3-port sparing panel NTFP99 214
Faceplate of a 6-module packet server service
processor with PEC NTHW18 216
Faceplate of a 4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP 219
Faceplate of a 4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP with
PEC NTHW70 224
Faceplate of a 16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP with MT-RJ
connectors with PEC NTHW21 228
Faceplate of a 16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP with LC
connectors with PEC NTHW31 232
The LC cable assembly with duplex connectors and
duplex cables 235
Faceplate of a 16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FP
with PEC NTHW44 239
The LC cable assembly with duplex connectors and
duplex cables 246
The connection setup of a fiber optical duplex Y-splitter
cables used for Y-protection 248
An example of a fiber optical duplex Y-splitter cable
assembly used for Y-protection 249
Faceplate of a 1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP with PEC
NTHR29 251
Faceplate of a 4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM FP with PEC
NTHW11 or NTHW86 255
Faceplate of a 1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP with APS
with PEC NTHW01 259
Faceplate of a 1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP with PEC
NTHW39 263
Faceplate of a 1-port STM-1 FP with PEC NTHR83 266
Contents 19
Figure 73
Figure 74
Figure 75
Figure 76
Figure 77
Figure 78
Figure 79
Figure 80
Figure 81
Figure 82
Figure 83
Figure 84
Figure 85
Figure 86
Figure 87
Figure 88
Figure 89
Figure 90
Figure 91
Figure 92
Figure 93
Figure 94
Figure 95
Figure 96
Figure 97
Figure 98
Figure 99
Figure 100
Figure 101
Faceplate of a VPN extender card with PEC

NTHW30 270
Faceplate of a VSP2 FP with PEC NTHW87 273
Faceplate of a VSP3 FP with PEC NTHW84 275
An example duplex LC-to-LC cable assembly 277
Example of spared VSP3 cards in a LAN hardware
configuration 282
Faceplate of a VSP3-o FP card with PEC NTHW77 284
A typical SFP optical module 288
A 12-port DS3 or E3 fanout panel NTHW52 298
A 12-port DS3 or E3 one-for-six fanout sparing panel
NTQS31 302
A 4-port DS3 one-for-one 19-inch sparing panel
NTHR79 305
A 3-port DS3, E3, or E1 one-for-one 19-inch sparing
panel NTFP99AA 307
Balanced multiport aggregate device 309
Unbalanced multiport aggregate device 310
Metal and plastic cable management brackets on a
NEBS 2000 frame 317
A plastic cable management bracket P0937935 318
High-density cable management bracket pair 321
A NEBS 2000 frame with extended cable management
brackets and side panel brackets 322
An extended cable management bracket for the right
side of a NEBS 2000 frame 323
Frame-to-frame joining brackets 325
A dual-drawer fiber management unit NTHW50 327
A duplex cable assembly with LC-to-LC
connectors 333
Cable assembly with an MT-RJ fiber connector and a
duplex SC connector 334
Labels of mini-coax and BNC cable connections on an
NTHR58 cable assembly 338
Pinouts of mini-coax and BNC cable connections of an
NTHR58 342
Location of the alarm module status LEDs 348
Location of BIM status LEDs 349
Location of PIM status LEDs for feeds A and B 351
Location of fabric status LEDs in a Passport 15000 353
Location of fabric status LEDs in a Passport 20000 355
5.2S2
20 Contents
Figure 102
Figure 103
Figure 104
Figure 105
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Location of the common CP or FP card status

LEDs 357
The Ethernet port status LEDs of an NTHW49 361
Location of fan controller status LEDs 364
Location of status LEDs for sparing panel NTQS31 366
Contents 21
List of tables
Table 1
Table 2
Table 3
Table 4
Table 5
Table 6
Table 7
Table 8
Table 9
Table 10
Table 11
Table 12
Table 13
Table 14
Table 15
Table 16
Table 17
Table 18
Table 19
Table 20
Table 21
Table 22
Table 23
Table 24
Table 25
Table 26
Table 27
Table 28
Table 29
Circuit breaker configuration for each BIM of a

Passport 15000 or 20000 55
Combinations of BIMs in a BIP 60
Alarm LED status indicators for BIMs 61
Power LED status indicators for BIMs 61
Power LED status indicators for the BIP alarm
module 63
Frame level indicators for the BIP alarm module 64
Features of the BIP alarm connectors 70
Pin-to-pin connections between an MFA150 controller
card and a BIP 72
BIP backplane power connections in a dual shelf
frame 75
The features of a 40 Gbits/s fabric 99
The features of a 70 Gbits/s fabric 101
Durations for replacing a fabric 105
Pin description for the PIM faceplate power
connector 108
Power LED status indicators for each PIM 110
Fan connector pin-out 120
BIP alarm connector pin-out 121
Typical line build out application settings 125
Maximum shelf heat dissipation relative to ambient room
temperature 132
Cooling unit LED indications 134
Interface cables between a Passport 15000 or 20000
and an EdgeLink 100 145
CP minimum software requirements for a
Passport 15000 153
CP minimum software requirements for a
Passport 20000 153
Prefabricated CP cable assemblies 154
Ethernet connector pinouts 158
V.24 connector pinouts 158
Cable assemblies for a DS3Ch TDM FP 162
Cable assembly parts for a 2-port DS3Ch TDM FP 163
4-port DS3Ch FR identifiers 166
Cable assemblies for a 4-port DS3 FR FP 168
5.2S2
22 Contents
Table 30
Table 31
Table 32
Table 33
Table 34
Table 35
Table 36
Table 37
Table 38
Table 39
Table 40
Table 41
Table 42
Table 43
Table 44
Table 45
Table 46
Table 47
Table 48
Table 49
Table 50
Table 51
Table 52
Table 53
Table 54
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Mapping an 8W8 and BNC cable to a termination panel

from a DS3Ch FR FP 171
Cable assemblies for a 4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with
IMA 176
from a DS3Ch ATM FP 179
Cable assemblies for a 4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1
CES 181
from a DS3Ch FP 184
Cable assemblies for a DS3 FP 188
from a 12-port DS3 FP 191
Mapping of 8W8 and BNC connectors for ports P0, P1,
and P2 194
Cable assemblies for an E3 FP 198
from a 12-port E3 FP 201
Ethernet connector pinouts 204
Cable assemblies for a 32-port TDM FP 211
Cable assembly parts for a 32-port E1 TDM FP 212
4-port OC-3/STM-1 FP identifiers 218
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM general interface
characteristics 221
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM SM IR FP transmit
characteristics 221
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM SM IR FP receive
characteristics 221
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM MM FP transmit
characteristics 222
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM MM FP receive
characteristics 222
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP general interface
characteristics 225
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP transmit
characteristics 226
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP receive
characteristics 226
General interface characteristics for an NTHW21 229
Transmit characteristics for an NTHW21 230
Receive characteristics for an NTHW21 230
Contents 23
Table 55
Table 56
Table 57
Table 58
Table 59
Table 60
Table 61
Table 62
Table 63
Table 64
Table 65
Table 66
Table 67
Table 68
Table 69
Table 70
Table 71
Table 72
Table 73
Table 74
Table 75
Table 76
Table 77

Transmit characteristics for an NTHW31 236
Receive characteristics for an NTHW31 237
Transmit characteristics for an NTHW44 with MM SR-0
SFP modules 242
Receive characteristics for an NTHW44 with MM SR-0
SFP modules 242
Transmit characteristics for an NTHW44 with SM IR-1/
S-1.1 SFP modules 242
Receive characteristics for an NTHW44 with SM IR-1/
S-1.1 SFP modules 243
Transmit characteristics for an NTHW44 with SM LR-1/
L-1.1 SFP modules 243
Receive characteristics for an NTHW44 with SM LR-1/
L-1.1 SFP modules 244
1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP general interface
characteristics 252
1-port OC-12/STM-4 SM LR FP transmit
characteristics 253
1-port OC-12/STM-4 SM LR FP receive
characteristics 253
4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM identifiers 254
4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM FP general interface
characteristics 256
4-port OC-12/STM-4 SM IR ATM FP transmit
characteristics 257
4-port OC-12/STM-4 SM IR ATM FP receive
characteristics 257
1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP general interface
characteristics 260
1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP transmit
characteristics 261
1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP receive
characteristics 261
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP general interface
characteristics 264
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS SM SR FP transmit
characteristics 264
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS SM SR FP receive
characteristics 265
5.2S2
24 Contents
Table 78
Table 79
Table 80
Table 81
Table 82
Table 83
Table 84
Table 85
Table 86
Table 87
Table 88
Table 89
Table 90
Table 91
Table 92
Table 93
Table 94
Table 95
Table 96
Table 97
Table 98
Table 99
Table 100
Table 101
Table 102
Table 103
Table 104
Table 105
Table 106
Table 107
Table 108
Table 109
241-1501-200 5.2S2
1-port STM-1 FP general interface characteristics 267

1-port STM-1 SM IR FP transmit characteristics 268
1-port STM-1 SM IR FP receive characteristics 268
VSP3-o FP general interface characteristics 286
VSP3-o FP transmit characteristics 286
VSP3-o FP receive characteristics 286
E1 RJ45 connector pinouts 311
Dimensions of fanout and sparing panels 313
Position of each FP cable bundle on right-side extended
cable brackets 328
Position of each FP cable bundle on left-side extended
cable brackets 329
Prefabricated FP control port cables for connecting to a
sparing panel 335
Prefabricated 75-ohm cables for connecting FPs to a
sparing panel 336
Prefabricated DS3 or E3 cables connecting FPs to an
NTHW52 336
Prefabricated FP cable assemblies to a fanout panel
NTHW52 341
Prefabricated FP cable assemblies to a one-for-six
sparing panel NTHR37 341
Prefabricated FP cable assemblies to the control ports
on an NTHR37 341
Power LED status indicators for each PIM 350
LED statuses of a DS3 or E3 sparing panel 365
CP and FP signalling cable assemblies and mounting
equipment 373
Custom-made cable assemblies 374
Prefabricated cable assemblies 374
Spare parts kit NTQS29AA for a Passport 15000 375
Spare parts kit NTQS29AB for a Passport 15000 376
Spare parts kit NTQH29AA for a Passport 20000 376
Spare parts kit NTQH29AB for a Passport 20000 377
Spare parts kit NTQH29AC for a Passport 20000 377
Spare parts kit NTQH29AD for a Passport 20000 378
Cooling unit parts for the AA versions 378
Cooling unit parts for the AB versions 379
BIP parts for a Passport 15000 380
BIP parts for a Passport 20000 380
Frame accessories and other filler hardware 381
Contents 25
Table 110
Table 111
Table 112
Table 113
Table 114
Table 115
Table 116
Table 117
Table 118
Table 119
Table 120
Shelf assemblies for a Passport 15000 382

Shelf assemblies for a Passport 20000 382
All other plug-in or screw-on parts for a
Passport 15000 383
All other plug-in or screw-on parts for a
Passport 20000 383
All other plug-in or screw-on parts for a Passport 15000
or 20000 384
Interface cables for interworking between an EdgeLink
100 and a Passport 15000 or 20000 384
Relay racks for an MFA150 power system 385
Isolation kits for an MFA150 power system 386
Cables and lugs per ac circuit breaker for an MFA150
power system 386
Spare and repair parts for an MFA150 power
system 387
Circuit breakers on the controller of an MFA150 387
5.2S2
26 Contents
241-1501-200 5.2S2
27
About this document

The information in this document describes the switch hardware parts and
subassemblies for housing a Passport 15000 or 20000 in a Network
Equipment Building System (NEBS) frame or equivalent mounting
apparatus. The frame has product engineering code (PEC) NTRU04, and is
also known as the PTE 2000.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
Who should read this document and why (page 27)
What you need to know (page 27)
Whats new in this document (page 28)
Related documents (page 34)
How to get more help (page 35)
Who should read this document and why

This document is intended for use by:
hardware maintenance personnel
hardware installation personnel
network planners
network engineers
What you need to know

You should be familiar with fundamental data communications and basic
electronic concepts and terms. You can acquire product knowledge by reading
241-5701-030 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Overview.
5.2S2
28
About this document
Only information specific to the Passport 15000 or 20000 hardware is

contained in this guide.
WARNING
Risk of radio interference
Passport 15000 is a class A product. In a domestic

environment this product may cause radio interference, in
which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
Whats new in this document

The following features were added to this document:
Structural changes (page 31)
16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FP with PEC NTHW44

(page 33)
An additional version of the lower and upper cooling units (page 33)
Enclosing a NEBS 2000 frame with doors and side panels (page 34)

(2pOC3ChSmIrVsp3) (page 34)
Y-protection for dual 16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FPs

(page 34)
Other changes made to this document include the following:
changed the requirements for matching BIMs to a BIP version in

Combined BIM pairs in a BIP (page 60)
added the direction of airflow in a shelf-based Passport 15000 or 20000

in Environmental control equipment (page 129)
in Air filters (page 133) re-emphasized that they must be replaced and
included a reference to the NTP that indicates when and how to replace
them
241-1501-200 5.2S2
About this document 29
in 100BaseT Ethernet cable assembly (page 204) added note

emphasizing that in order to meet EMC requirements, minimum grade of
Ethernet cabling for a NTHW10 (2pGPDsk FP) card is a Category 5
shielded twisted pair (STP).
clarified the cable information in CP cables (page 153) and added the
figures CP2 Ethernet cable NT0460 (page 156) and CP2 Ethernet
crossover cable NT0477 with RJ-45 connectors and ferrite bead
(page 157)
for a 4-port Gigabit Ethernet FP (page 205) -- 4pGe or NTHW49:

indicated the port LEDs in the figure Faceplate of a 4-port Gigabit
Ethernet FP with PEC NTHW49 (page 206)
updated the cable information in 4-port Gigabit Ethernet cable
assemblies (page 206)
added SFP modules for an NTHW49 (page 208)
added Custom-making an LC cable assembly for an NTHW49
(page 207) from SFP optical module (page 288)
moved the section Status LEDs of the Ethernet ports on an
NTHW49 (page 359) into the section Status LEDs of a CP or an
FP card (page 356) and renamed it Status LEDs of the Ethernet
ports on an NTHW49 (page 359)
updated the description of LED behavior in Status LEDs of the
Ethernet ports on an NTHW49 (page 359)
updated the figure Faceplate of a 16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP with

LC connectors with PEC NTHW31 (page 232) to correct the orientation
of the Rx and Tx ports
corrected the status of port 4 (P4) in the figures Faceplate of a CP3 with
PEC NTHW06 or NTHW08 (page 151) and Faceplate of a VPN
extender card with PEC NTHW30 (page 270)
updating the figures The LC cable assembly with duplex connectors and
duplex cables (page 235) and An example duplex LC-to-LC cable
assembly (page 277) to change the length of cable neck and connector
added the figure An extended cable management bracket for the right
side of a NEBS 2000 frame (page 323)
5.2S2
30
About this document
adding the PECs of SFP optical modules for NTHW44 cards to the table
FP cards, SFP modules, and termination panels (page 370)
changed the compliance dates in Optical module compliances

(page 290) for IEEE802 and IEC part 1040
updated Cables and cable management (page 315) to distinguish the

hardware that manages low, high, and very high densities of fiber and
coax cabling
updated Basic cable management brackets for low-density cabling
(page 316)
added Cable management brackets for high-density cabling
(page 319)
renamed Increasing cable management with extended brackets to
Very high-density cable management brackets (page 321)
added the package number of multiple air filters to the tables

Spare parts kit NTQS29AA for a Passport 15000 (page 375)
Spare parts kit NTQS29AB for a Passport 15000 (page 376)
Cooling unit parts for the AA versions (page 378)
Cooling unit parts for the AB versions (page 379)
added the table Spare parts kit NTQS29AA for a Passport 15000
(page 375)
added the software name (card type) to each FP description throughout

the document
amended the figure Faceplate of a CP3 with PEC NTHW06 or

NTHW08 (page 151) to reflect the deletion of the unused P4 port from
the faceplate in the latest version of this hardware, and the correction of
the PEC from NTHRW06 to NTHW06 in this figures title
for the P0 Ethernet port cable assemblies, added the statement in the table
Prefabricated CP cable assemblies (page 154) that although STP
Ethernet cabling is shipped with the CP3 card, the minimum shielding
requirement is for UTP cabling
241-1501-200 5.2S2
amended the section Status LEDs of a CP (page 357) to give more

detail about the LED behaviour of the P0 Ethernet port on the NTHW06
and NTHW08 CP3 cards
added the spare parts kits as the following tables:

Spare parts kit NTQH29AA for a Passport 20000 (page 376)
Spare parts kit NTQH29AB for a Passport 20000 (page 377)
Spare parts kit NTQH29AC for a Passport 20000 (page 377)
Spare parts kit NTQH29AD for a Passport 20000 (page 378)
Structural changes
This document was restructured as follows to improve the usability of the
information.
moved these sections from this document to 241-5701-615 Passport

7400, 15000, 20000 FP Configuration Reference:
feature-specific function processor (FP) information
clocking, configuration, and line rate
standards compliance information
added Passport 15000 or 20000 equipment status (page 48)
added Hardware parts that can be replaced or upgraded (page 49)
added BIMs distributing power to PIMs (page 56)
updated Hardware for connecting power input cables to the BIP

(page 75)
updated Function of the BIP backplane power input connections

(page 74)
updated Using an optional power-and-ground assembly (page 76)
added Grounding the Passport and interworking equipment (page 85)
updated Alarm/BITS module (page 114)
added Connecting a Passport to another node (page 142)
added High-density cable management brackets (page 320)
5.2S2
32
About this document
added these sections from 241-1501-210 Passport 15000, 20000

Hardware Installation Guide:
CP cables (page 153)
Timing cable specifications for the DS1 circuit (page 123)
Assigning sparing panel connections for 2-port DS3C TDM FPs
(page 164)
Assigning sparing panel connections for 4-port DS3 FPs
(page 171)
Assigning sparing panel connections for a 12-port DS3 or E3 FP
(page 192)
Assigning sparing panel connections for 32-port E1 TDM FPs
(page 213)
Timing cable specifications for the E1 balanced circuit (page 123)
Timing cable specifications for the E1 unbalanced circuit
(page 124)
Location of specific FP cables in a bundle (page 328)
Preparing OC or STM fiber distribution cables (page 331)
LC fiber cables and connectors (page 332)
MT-RJ fiber cables and connectors (page 333)
Preparing coax distribution cables (page 335)
Preparing control port cables (page 338)
Handling alarm cables (page 340)
Prefabricated DS3 or E3 cable assemblies (page 340)
added these sections from 241-1501-215 Passport 15000, 20000

Hardware Maintenance Guide:
Using status indicator LEDs and sounds (page 343)
Fabric LED behavior is different from FPs (page 104)
Fabric replacement can affect traffic (page 104)
Fabric replacement can affect system cooling (page 105)
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Fabric replacement may need a firmware upgrade (page 106)

Field replaceable units (page 367)
edited introductory sections of each FP to improve consistency
compressed all occurrences of control processor to CP and function

processor to FP, except for the first occurrence in each chapter
deleted Clocking behaviors of processor cards
deleted Upgrading or downgrading processor cards
16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FP with PEC NTHW44

The function processor (FP) 16-port OC-3/STM-1 packet over SONET (POS)
and asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) with product engineering code
(PEC) NTHW44 and software name 16pOC3PosAtm is added to the list of
available FPs. This document is updated by:
adding 16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FP (page 238), which

includes a figure of its faceplate and a description of its interfacing cable
assemblies
adding the PEC to the table FP cards, SFP modules, and termination
panels (page 370)
An additional version of the lower and upper cooling units

An additional version of the lower (rear) and upper (front) cooling units is
available. The following distinguish one version from the other:
updated the section Cooling units (page 126)
added the table Spare parts kit NTQS29AB for a Passport 15000
(page 376)
updated the table Cooling unit parts to become Cooling unit parts for
the AA versions (page 378)
added the table Cooling unit parts for the AB versions (page 379)
5.2S2
34
About this document
Enclosing a NEBS 2000 frame with doors and side panels

A NEBS 2000 frame can be enclosed by adding doors to the front and rear of
the frame using the hardware kit NTQS37AA or NTQS37AB and by adding
the side panels and hardware from the kit NTPX4050. These changes are
made to this document:
NEBS 2000 frame enclosure (page 137)
added the hardware kit numbers to the table Frame accessories and
other filler hardware (page 381)

(2pOC3ChSmIrVsp3)
The following sections were added or updated for this feature.
Control and function processors (page 141)
Voice services processor 3 with optical TDM interface (VSP3-o) FP

(page 283)
Faceplate of a VSP3-o FP card with PEC NTHW77 (page 284)
VSP3-o FP line connections (page 284)
VSP3-o FP cable assembly (page 285)
VSP3-o FP optical interface characteristics (page 285)
VSP3-o FP sparing (page 287)
Y-protection for dual 16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FPs

The following sections were added or updated this feature.
Cable assemblies for an NTHW44 (page 240)
Specifications for Y-splitter cable assemblies for Y-protection

(page 246)
Status LEDs of an FP (page 358) to indicate that cards with

Y-protection have the same LED behavior as cards with LAPS
Related documents
See the following documents for related information:
241-1501-200 5.2S2
241-5701-001 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Documentation Guide
241-5701-002 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Using New Task-based

Documentation
241-5701-005 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 List of Terms
241-5701-030 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Overview
241-1501-205 Passport 15000, 20000 Site Requirements and

Preparation Guide
241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Installation,

Maintenance and Upgrade
241-5701-600 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Configuration Guide
241-5701-615 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 FP Configuration Reference
241-7401-200 Passport 7400 Hardware Description
167-9021-102 Advanced Power Systems MFA150 Modular Front Access

Power System Description, Operation and Maintenance User Manual
167-9021-133 Advanced Power Systems MFA150 Modular Front Access

Power System Detailed Installation Guidelines and Procedures Manual
How to get more help

For information on training, problem reporting, and technical support, see the
Nortel Networks support services section in the product overview
document.
5.2S2
36
About this document
241-1501-200 5.2S2
37
Chapter 1
Introducing Passport 15000 or 20000
hardware
This section provides the following information as an introduction to the
Passport 15000 or 20000:
Passport 15000 overview (page 37)
Passport 20000 overview (page 42)
Passport 15000 and 20000 switch architecture (page 44)
Frame assembly overview (page 46)
Breaker interface panel overview (page 46)
Shelf assembly overview (page 46)
Control and function processors overview (page 47)
Cables and cable management overview (page 48)
Peripheral interworking equipment (page 48)
Passport 15000 or 20000 equipment status (page 48)
Hardware parts that can be replaced or upgraded (page 49)
Where appropriate, each of the topics listed above provides a cross-reference

to the section or sections where more detailed information is located.
Passport 15000 overview

The Passport 15000 is a high-capacity ATM node which can act as a
backbone or edge node to an ATM network.
5.2S2
38 Chapter 1 Introducing Passport 15000 or 20000 hardware
The Passport 15000 supports electrical and optical interfaces with a variety of
speeds from E3 up to STM-16 and from DS3 up to OC-48.
The Passport 15000 supports two types of timing source: building integrated
timing supply (BITS) to the alarm/BITS module, and line timing to a fiber
optic functional processor (FP). The Passport 15000 node can receive the
external timing signal from BITS or line timing, and distribute either signal
throughout the Passport 15000. That is, a Passport 15000 simultaneously
supports a combination of BITS and line timing.
The figure Two Passport 15000 switches or two Passport 20000 switches in
a NEBS 2000 frame (page 39) shows two switches (shelves) in one frame.
The front view of a Passport 20000 is very similar to a Passport 15000.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Chapter 1 Introducing Passport 15000 or 20000 hardware 39

Figure 1
Two Passport 15000 switches or two Passport 20000 switches in a NEBS 2000 frame
Passport 15000
or 20000
NEBS2000
frame
Passport 15000
or 20000
PPT 3159 001 AA
5.2S2
By combining a Passport 15000 with another Nortel Networks node or by

upgrading plug-in cards or modules, different services, functionality, or
capacities are provided. See the section Passport 15000-VSS overview
(page 40).
Passport 15000-VSS overview

Passport 15000-VSS is an integrated edge and core multi-service node.
Passport 15000-VSS offers low speed accessibility at the edge of a network
and high speed switching at the core of a network. Passport 15000-VSS is a
Passport 7400 packaged within a Passport 15000.
In addition to ATM, Passport 15000-VSS delivers a wide range of standardbased high-speed interfaces and services, including, frame relay, circuit
emulation, voice, and IP. These interfaces provide a wide variety of access
and trunking speeds from channelized DS0 to OC-48.
The figure A Passport 15000-VSS in a NEBS 2000 frame (page 41) shows
the main parts and subassemblies of a Passport 15000-VSS in its frame.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 2
A Passport 15000-VSS in a NEBS 2000 frame
PPT 2912 001 AA
5.2S2
Passport 20000 overview

The Passport 20000 Multiservice Switch is added to the Passport family of
switches. It operates by the same Passport Carrier Release (PCR) software as
the Passport 7000 series and the Passport 15000. The Passport 20000
provides the same functionality and services as a Passport 15000 except for
significant hardware improvements, especially with higher shelf (user)
capacity. The figure Two Passport 15000 switches or two Passport 20000
switches in a NEBS 2000 frame (page 39) shows two switches (shelves) in
one frame. The front view of a Passport 20000 is very similar to a
Passport 15000. The rear of the Passport 20000 is configured the same but has
a different look.
Although the Passport 20000 shares much of the Passport 15000 hardware,
the shelf assembly of the Passport 20000 has been re-designed with a scalable
backplane, ship-in-place hardware, and different plug-ins. Because of the
physical improvements that the shelf assembly provides, a Passport 15000
cannot be upgraded to a Passport 20000 by changing plug-in cards or
modules. Processor cards from a Passport 15000 or 20000 can be shared, but
a Passport 20000 is a separate shelf with its own software identity.
The plug-in modules and fabrics at the rear of the Passport 20000 switch are
redesigned for improved capacity, performance, or usability. The modules
include:
the breaker interface modules (BIMs) with 25 A breakers
the power interface modules (PIMs) with on/off LEDs
a DS1 or a balanced E1 alarm/BITS module with an add-on balun cable

assembly to make the E1 unbalanced
the MAC address module
two fabrics each with 70 Gbit/s usable shelf capacity (actual capacity is
112.6 Gbit/s each)
The backplane of the shelf assembly is designed to accommodate fabrics of

different capacities and is scalable to 160 Gbit/s. The initial 112 Gbit/s fabrics
continue to load-balance and load-share with 70 Gbit/s of shelf (user)
capacity so that either fabric can take over the load of its mate and FP traffic
is maintained.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
The Passport 20000 supports all of the function processors (FPs) of a

Passport 15000 that are compatible with the current Passport 20000 software
and supports the following control processors (CPs), each with a building
integrated timing supply (BITS) interface:
NTHW06xx for a DS1 CP3
NTHW08xx for an E1 CP3
The Passport 20000 can re-deploy FPs that were previously loaded with
Passport Carrier Release (PCR) software 2.3 or later, and re-deploy CP3s with
PCR 3.1 or later software provided the cards are migrated to the current PCR
of the switch.
The shelf assembly of the Passport 20000 is designed to ship cards in place.
This means that the control processor (CP3), function processor (FP), and
fabric cards can be pre-loaded with software, placed in pre-determined slots
(including filler cards), and shipped safely in a partially seated transportation
position. Shipping in place means the cards can be powered up as soon as they
are seated.
The Passport 20000 supports all the optional hardware, software
functionality, and software services that a Passport 15000 has except there is
no equivalent Passport 15000-VSS.
The planning and setup criteria in 241-1501-205 Passport 15000, 20000 Site
Requirements and Preparation Guide are the same as the Passport 15000.
Some of the methods of installing modules change slightly.
For a detailed description of what a card or module does or how it differs in
the Passport 20000, see the appropriate section in this document.
For the procedures to initially install and maintain a Passport 15000 or 20000,
refer to 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Installation,
Maintenance and Upgrade.
5.2S2
Passport 15000 and 20000 switch architecture

Passport 15000 and 20000 switch architecture uses an input/output buffered
cross bar switching fabric with hardware support for both cell-based and
frame-based services. The fabric is implemented with redundant serial links
to a central 16 bi-directional port fabric module as shown in the figure
Passport 15000 and 20000 switch architecture (page 45).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 3
Passport 15000 and 20000 switch architecture
Frameand
andCell
CellInterfaces
Interfaces
Frame
BITS/ESI (E1/T1)
(E1/T1)
BITS/ESI
Ethernet,
Ethernet, RS232
RS232
Control
Control
Processor
Processor
Functional
Functional
Processor
Processor
Accounting
Accounting
&
& statistics
statistics
Functional
Functional
Processor
Processor
Link
Link
interface
interface
Routing
Routing
tables
tables
BITS/ESI(E1/T1)
(E1/T1)
BITS/ESI
Ethernet,
Ethernet,RS232
RS232
Link
Link
interface
interface
Hardware
Hardware
queuing
queuing
Hardware
Hardware
queuing
queuing
High
HighPerf
Perf
Processor
Processor
High
HighPerf
Perf
Processor
Processor
Fabric
Fabric
interface
interface
Fabric
Fabric
interface
interface
.......
.......
Fabric
Fabric
interface
interface
Control
Control
Processor
Processor
Routing
Routing
tables
tables
Accounting
Accounting
&&statistics
statistics
Fabric
Fabric
interface
interface
Up
Uptoto14
14FPs
FPs
56.32 Gbit/s Fabric

Module
Fabric (Fabric
ModuleX)
X
Redundant
Redundant
3.52
Gbit/s BiBi-directional
directional
Seriallinks
links
Serial
(2.5 Gbps user
bandwidth)
56.32 Gbit/s Fabric

Module
Fabric(Fabric
ModuleY)Y
PPT 3161 002 AA

PPT 3161 002 AA
5.2S2
Frame assembly overview

One or two Passport 15000 or 20000 switches (not a combination) can be
housed in a single frame assembly that is compliant with the network
equipment building system (NEBS).
A single Passport 15000 or 20000 can be installed in a mounting apparatus
other than a NEBS 2000 frame. See 241-1501-205 Passport 15000, 20000
Site Requirements and Preparation Guide for the criteria of using a different
mounting apparatus.
For more information on the dimensions and footprint of the frames, refer to
241-1501-205 Passport 15000, 20000 Site Requirements and Preparation
Guide.
Breaker interface panel overview

The main function of the breaker interface panel (BIP) is to provide single or
dual (redundant) dc power and frame level alarm indications to one or two
Passport 15000 or 20000 switches in a frame assembly.
See Breaker interface panel (page 51) for a detailed description of the
subassemblies and parts of the BIP.
Shelf assembly overview

The Passport 15000 or 20000 shelf assembly houses most of the parts which
make up a single Passport 15000 or 20000 switch, including the switching
fabrics, backplane, control and function processor cards, alarm/BITS
termination, power interfaces, and the MAC address module.
For a Passport 20000 that is shipped already installed in a NEBS 2000 frame,
all cards and modules that plug into the shelf assembly are shipped in place.
The modules at the rear of the shelf assembly are fully seated. The control and
function processor cards and the fabric cards are partially installed but
unseated in a transportation position. The transportation position prevents
damage to the backplane connectors and pins from vibrations during
shipping. The cards are also shipped in their appropriate slots and with the
PCR software already loaded.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
See Shelf assembly (page 87) for a detailed description of the parts in a
Passport 15000 or 20000 shelf.
Control and function processors overview

Control processors (CP) and function processors (FP) are the processing
elements for performing and managing Passport 15000 or 20000 functions. In
most cases, the software providing a service is split into control and function
parts. In general, the control part runs on the CP; the function part runs on the
FP. This results in
more efficient data flow since the FP does not do resource-consuming

non-data-path processing
more efficient memory resources for data transmission
See Control and function processors (page 141) for detailed information
about each processor card available with Passport 15000 or 20000. For
information about the various services supported by specific Passport FPs see
241-5701-615 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 FP Configuration Reference.
Upgrading processor cards

You can upgrade or downgrade a processor card (CP or FP) from one version
to another. Upgrading means to replace an existing processor card with
another card of the same type but offering more services. Downgrading
means to replace an existing processor card with another card from a previous
release with less services. The following list briefly describes the various
types of upgrades:
hot-swapping means to replace a card while it is still active
line timing
spared means upgrading a card when it is locked and its spared card has
taken over service
unspared means upgrading a card when it not spared
For more information on upgrading and downgrading, see 241-1501-240

Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Installation, Maintenance and Upgrade.
5.2S2
Cables and cable management overview

Cable management hardware for the Passport 15000 or 20000 and frame
assembly consists of hardware subassemblies for protecting, routing,
securing cables (copper, fiber, and system interconnect cables), and managing
cable slack.
See Cables and cable management (page 315) for detailed information
about Passport 15000 or 20000 cables and cable management.
Peripheral interworking equipment

Peripheral equipment is any non-Passport equipment that can be connected to
a Passport 15000 or 20000 to provide additional functionality, service,
capability, or performance. Nortel Networks supports specific peripheral
equipment to interwork with a Passport 15000 or 20000. The peripheral
equipment includes:
an EdgeLink mux by Telco Systems
an external hardware alarm (for example, an end-of-aisle lamp)
an MFA150 system of ac rectifiers by Astec Advanced power Systems
a multiport aggregate device by Nortel Networks
a Shasta 5000 switch by Nortel Networks
Information about the installation or operation of the equipment is included

in the Passport 15000 or 20000 suite of hardware documents. Where the
information appears depends on what tasks are involved in getting the
equipment installed, cabled, and tested. Refer to the table of contents to locate
your task.
Passport 15000 or 20000 equipment status

Each operating unit of hardware for a Passport 15000 or 20000 has status
LEDs to indicate what it is doing.The patterns of LED behavior per unit of
hardware are described in Using status indicator LEDs and sounds
(page 343).
Sounds are provided through optional external alarms to customer premises
equipment (CPE). Connecting external alarms is described in 241-1501-240
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Hardware parts that can be replaced or upgraded

Most Passport 15000 or 20000 hardware units can be replaced due to failure
or damage. All such field replaceable units (FRUs) and service replaceable
units (SRUs) are listed in Field replaceable units (page 367). This list is
more comprehensive than the Passport 15000 or 20000 Ordering Catalog
because it includes part numbers of some assemblies.
5.2S2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
51
Chapter 2
Breaker interface panel
The breaker interface panel (BIP) provides a central location where redundant
input dc power feeds (nominal -48/-60 V) of up to 100 A are connected and
routed to two or four breaker interface modules (BIMs). Power is distributed
from the BIMs to the shelves and cooling units. Passport 15000 or 20000
supports the use of either a two-BIM (single shelf) or a four-BIM (dual shelf)
BIP. The BIP also contains an alarm module which monitors system parts,
generates alarms, and controls LED status indicators.
The following BIP components and connections are described in this section:
Front cover of the BIP (page 53)
Breaker interface modules (BIMs) (page 54)
BIM filler plates (page 62)
Alarm module (page 62)
Alarm cable connectors (page 68)
Power connections to and from the BIP backplane (page 73)
Sources of dc input power to the BIP backplane (page 83)
Grounding the Passport and interworking equipment (page 85)
See the figure The BIP in a NEBS 2000 frame, front view (page 52) for the
location of individual parts, and Rear of the BIP (page 53) for the location
of input power cables.
5.2S2
52 Chapter 2 Breaker interface panel

Figure 4
The BIP in a NEBS 2000 frame, front view
Top of frame
BIM
Breaker
Cover of
BIM captive
screws
Alarm module
Top hole or
dimple of front
right frame
upright
BIP
Captive screw
Space for
air flow
PPT 2820 021 AA
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Chapter 2 Breaker interface panel 53

Figure 5
Rear of the BIP
Alarm cable
connections
Power to a cooling unit

Power to a PIM
From external
power feeds
Mounting ear
PPT 2820 035 AC
Front cover of the BIP

The BIP front cover has the following functions:
it protects the parts and connections on the front of the power breakers
and the alarm module
it directs air exhaust venting from the upper cooling unit
it provides tool-only access through captive screws (for security and

convenience)
5.2S2
The front cover can be opened to access the retaining screws holding the
breaker interface modules (BIMs) and alarm module in place. See The BIP
in a NEBS 2000 frame, front view (page 52) for an illustration of the BIP
with the front cover opened.
Breaker interface modules (BIMs)

This section describes the location and functions of the breaker interface
modules (BIMs) inside the breaker interface panel (BIP). It provides
information on the following topics:
BIP with two or four BIMs (page 54)
Location of the BIMs (page 55)
Functions of the BIMs (page 55)
BIMs distributing power to PIMs (page 56)
Combined BIM pairs in a BIP (page 60)
Front panel of a BIM (page 60)
BIM power filters (page 61)
BIP with two or four BIMs

Two models of the BIP are available: one with two breaker interface modules
(BIMs) or one with four BIMs. The two-BIM model is used in the NEBS
2000 frame or equivalent mounting apparatus to support only one
Passport 15000 or 20000 (for example, in equipment packages NTQS10 and
NTHQ10). The four-BIM model is used in NEBS 2000 frame when two
Passport 15000 switches or two Passport 20000 switches are housed (for
example, in equipment packages NTQS20 or NTQH20). If a two-BIM model
is used (for example, in NTQS04 and NTQH04), the empty BIM slots are
covered with filler plates to protect BIP circuitry and to meet safety
requirements. See BIM filler plates (page 62) for more information.
When a second switch is added to the NEBS 2000 frame, two additional
BIMs can be added to the BIP to power that switch. Refer to the criteria in
Combined BIM pairs in a BIP (page 60).
241-1501-200 5.2S2
When one Passport 15000 or 20000 is shipped in the NEBS 2000 frame, the
insulation boots and lugs are provided for the second set of BIMs. This
accommodates adding a second switch of the same kind to the frame. The
equipment package NTQS10 or NTQH10 includes the wiring harnesses for
adding a second shelf.
Location of the BIMs

The breaker interface modules (BIMs) are located in the breaker interface
panel (BIP). In four-BIM models, all BIM slots are filled up to the alarm
module. In two-BIM models, the BIMs are located in the two right-hand slots
next to the alarm module, with the two left BIM slots covered with filler
plates. See the figure The BIP in a NEBS 2000 frame, front view (page 52).
See BIM filler plates (page 62).
Functions of the BIMs

The power breakers on each BIM control the -48/-60 V dc A and B power
supplies to the power interface modules (PIMs) and to the upper and lower
cooling units. See the figure The BIP in a NEBS 2000 frame, front view
(page 52) for the location of the power breakers.
For a Passport 15000, each BIM with PEC NT6C60PA supports a maximum
of five PCB-mount circuit breakers made up of four 20-amp shelf breakers
and one central 5-amp cooling unit breaker. See the table Circuit breaker
configuration for each BIM of a Passport 15000 or 20000 (page 55). The
position of the breaker is relative to facing the front of the BIP.
Table 1
Circuit breaker configuration for each BIM of a Passport 15000 or 20000
Location of
circuit breaker
Left
Middle
left
Middle
Middle
right
Right
Passport 15000 20 amp
20 amp
5 amp
20 amp
20 amp
Passport 20000 25 amp
25 amp
5 amp
25 amp
25 amp
shelf
shelf
cooling
upper half upper half units
shelf
shelf
lower half lower half
5.2S2
For a Passport 20000, each BIM with PEC AP6C67PA supports a maximum
of five PCB-mount circuit breakers made up of four 25-A shelf breakers and
one central 5 A cooling unit breaker. See the table Circuit breaker
configuration for each BIM of a Passport 15000 or 20000 (page 55). The
position of the breaker is relative to facing the front of the BIP.
Although the breakers of BIMs for a Passport 20000 are higher than those of
a Passport 15000, the maximum power input feed is 100 A for either type of
switch. When having a Passport 15000 and 20000 in the same frame, observe
the criteria in Combined BIM pairs in a BIP (page 60).
The power breakers are arranged such that each Passport 15000 can draw
power from two independent power sources (usually labelled A and B). See
Function of the BIP backplane power input connections (page 74) for a
summary of the BIP power breaker functions. Breakers should be set to off
before a BIM is removed from the BIP. One BIM receives an input power feed
for a shelf, so that two BIMs are required for each shelf.
BIMs distributing power to PIMs

Each breaker interface module (BIM) receives power redundantly from the
site power source through separate feeds, labelled A and B. Since the PIMs
receive their power from the BIMs, each pair of PIMs per shelf also has an A
and B feed. Each pair of PIMs is referred to as a rear upper (RU) or rear lower
(RL) behind slots 7 and 15 to correspond to its position at the rear of the shelf.
The five breakers in each BIM are referred to as breakers 1 to 5 counting from
the left. Refer to the figures:
Relationship between feeds, breakers, and equipment slots in upper

shelf (page 57)
Relationship between feeds, breakers, and equipment slots in lower

shelf (page 58)
The BIP breakers that control specific PIMs are identified in the figure Cable
paths of PIMs at the rear of a NEBS 2000 frame (page 59).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 6
Relationship between feeds, breakers, and equipment slots in upper shelf
1
2
3
4
BIP
A1.1A1.2A1.1+
A1.2+
1
2
B2
A1.3A1.3+
A2
1
2
3
4
A1.4A1.5A1.4+
A1.5+
B1
A1
12345123451234512345
PIM
connectors
4
3
2
1
A2.1+
A2.2+
A2.1A2.2-
4
3
2
1
B2.2+
B2.1+
B2.2B2.1-
4
3
2
1
A2.4+
A2.5+
A2.4A2.5-
4
3
2
1
B2.5+
B2.4+
B2.5B2.4-
NT6C60PB
A2.1
B2.1
Powering A2.2
feeds B2.2
Slot #
0E
A2.1 A2.1
B2.1 B2.1
A2.2 A2.2
B2.2 B2.2
Slot #
1E
A2.2 A2.2
B2.2 B2.2
A2.5 A2.5
B2.5 B2.5
A2.4 A2.4
B2.4 B2.4
A2.4
B2.4
Powering A2.5
feeds B2.5
A2.1 A2.1
B2.1 B2.1
10
FAB
X
A2.4 A2.4
B2.4 B2.4
A2.5 A2.5
B2.5 B2.5
11
12
13
14
15
FAB
Y
Rear-mounted
fabrics
PPT 2820 010 AA
5.2S2

Figure 7
Relationship between feeds, breakers, and equipment slots in lower shelf
1
2
3
4
BIP
A1.1A1.2A1.1+
A1.2+
1
2
B2
A1.3A1.3+
A2
1
2
3
4
A1.4A1.5A1.4+
A1.5+
B1
A1
12345123451234512345
PIM
connectors
4
3
2
1
A1.1+
A1.2+
A1.1A1.2-
4
3
2
1
B1.2+
B1.1+
B1.2B1.1-
4
3
2
1
A1.4+
A1.5+
A1.4A1.5-
4
3
2
1
B1.5+
B1.4+
B1.5B1.4-
NT6C60PB
A1.1
B1.1
Powering A1.2
feeds B1.2
Slot #
0E
A1.1 A1.1
B1.1 B1.1
A1.2 A1.2
B1.2 B1.2
Slot #
1E
A1.2 A1.2
B1.2 B1.2
A1.5 A1.5
B1.5 B1.5
A1.4 A1.4
B1.4 B1.4
A1.4
B1.4
Powering A1.5
feeds B1.5
A1.1 A1.1
B1.1 B1.1
10
FAB
X
A1.4 A1.4
B1.4 B1.4
A1.5 A1.5
B1.5 B1.5
11
12
13
14
15
FAB
Y
Rear-mounted
fabrics
PPT 2820 010 AB
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 8
Cable paths of PIMs at the rear of a NEBS 2000 frame
Lower shelf
Upper shelf
B1.1 & B1.2

B1.3
B1.4 & B1.5
A2.4 & A2.5

A2.3
A2.1 & A2.2
A1.1 & A1.2

A1.3
A1.4 & A1.5
BIP
B2.4 & B2.5

B2.3
B2.1 & B2.2
Upper shelf
A2.1 & A2.2
B2.1 & B2.2
Top
Bottom
A2.4 & A2.5

B2.4 & B2.5
Upper (front)
cooling unit
A2.3
B2.3
Lower (rear)
cooling unit
A1.3
B1.3
Lower shelf
A1.1 & A1.2
B1.1 & B1.2
A1.4 & A1.5
B1.4 & B1.5
Top
Bottom
PPT 2820 014 AA2
5.2S2
Combined BIM pairs in a BIP

When two Passport 15000 or two Passport 20000 nodes are installed in the
same NEBS 2000 frame, they share the same BIP. When a Passport 15000
and a Passport 20000 are installed in the same NEBS 2000 frame, they can
safely share the same BIP (NT6C62 or AP6C68) even though the BIMs have
different ampere ratings.
Each BIM must be matched with its mate to safely distribute power to the
Passport 15000 or 20000, and the pair must be matched to the switch as
indicated in the table Combinations of BIMs in a BIP (page 60).
Table 2
Combinations of BIMs in a BIP
Shelf type
PEC of a BIP PECs of the BIM pairs that can be installed

with 2 BIMs
Passport 15000 NT6C62
two or four 20-amp NT6C60PA for one or two Passport 15000s

or
two 20-amp NT6C60PA for the Passport 15000 in the lower half
of the NEBS 2000 frame and
two 25-amp AP6C67PA for a Passport 20000 in the upper half
of the NEBS 2000 frame
Passport 20000
two or four 25-amp AP6C67PA for one or two Passport 20000s

or
two 25-amp AP6C67PA for the Passport 20000 in the lower half
of the NEBS 2000 frame and
two 20-amp NT6C60PA for a Passport 15000 in the upper half
of the NEBS 2000 frame
AP6C68
Since there is no visible exterior difference between the BIM faceplate of

either a Passport 15000 or 20000, you must use the part number that is labeled
on each unit.
Front panel of a BIM

The front panel of each breaker interface module (BIM) includes
a triangular alarm LED
a rectangular power LED
241-1501-200 5.2S2
five PCB circuit breakers (four 20 A and one 5 A)

for a Passport 15000, four 20 A and one 5 A
for a Passport 20000, four 25 A and one 5 A
a captive screw to hold the module in place
There is no visible exterior difference between the BIM faceplate of either a

Passport 15000 or 20000.
The different states of the LEDs are listed in the table Alarm LED status
indicators for BIMs (page 61) and the table Power LED status indicators
for BIMs (page 61).
Table 3
Alarm LED status indicators for BIMs
LED color Mode
Meaning
red
major fault
solid
off
no fault
Table 4
Power LED status indicators for BIMs
LED color Mode
Meaning
green
no fault, in service active
solid
off
invalid state test for loss of power
BIM power filters

Each BIM contains a power filter. Power filters ensure low frequency stability
of the battery feed lines that supply -48/-60 V dc power to each
Passport 15000 or 20000. This reduces the amount of electric noise produced
by each Passport and ensures clean power for the point-of-use power supplies
(PUPS) used in the processor cards and cooling units.
5.2S2
Note: Power cycling the breakers can be done on a Passport 15000 or

20000 without damaging equipment.
BIM filler plates

Filler plates are used to cover any empty power breaker interface module
(BIM) slots. Filler plates are fastened to the front of the BIP, over the empty
BIM slot, by a captive screw. Filler plates are used in two-BIM modules, in
which the BIP is installed in a frame which contains only one Passport 15000.
Filler plates must cover any empty BIM slots to protect BIP circuitry and to
ensure compliance to safety requirements.
Alarm module
This section provides information on the following topics relating to the BIP
alarm module:
Location of the BIP alarm module (page 62)
Functions of the BIP alarm module (page 62)
Front panel of the BIP alarm module (page 63)
Hardware alarm definitions (page 66)
Location of the BIP alarm module

The BIP alarm module is located at the front, on the right side of the BIP. See
the figures The BIP in a NEBS 2000 frame, front view (page 52) and
Alarm module of the BIP (page 65).
Functions of the BIP alarm module

The alarm module
monitors and filters alarms for hardware indicators and software displays
drives the alarm LED board (the board that activates the audio-visual
follow-me hardware indicators)
is part of the aisle alarm system
monitors the state of the power breakers
has numbered switches on the top of the module that are preset at the
factory and must not be adjusted
241-1501-200 5.2S2
The alarm module can monitor up to four cages contained in two nodes
housed in a single frame. The module can also be used to monitor external
office equipment.
Front panel of the BIP alarm module

The BIP alarm module front panel has the following features:
a triangular and a rectangular alarm LEDs for the alarm module; see the
table Power LED status indicators for the BIP alarm module (page 63)
for an explanation of the LED displays.
three separate alarm indicators for minor, major, and critical alarms. See
Hardware alarm definitions (page 66) for a description of alarm types.
a visual follow-me indicator of 10 LEDs to assist a craftsperson to locate

a faulty module; see the table Frame level indicators for the BIP alarm
module (page 64)
Note: When a Passport 15000 shares the BIP of a Passport 20000, that is,
the two nodes are installed in the same frame, the LED test function
operates only for the Passport 20000.
a LEDTEST switch which, when pressed for five seconds, causes all the
BIP LED alarm indicators to light up
an audible alarm cut-off switch labeled ACO
a captive screw to hold the module in place
Table 5
Power LED status indicators for the BIP alarm module
LED color
Shape
Mode
Meaning
green
triangle
solid
no fault, in service active
red
square
solid
minor fault with the alarm module
off
invalid state test for loss of power
5.2S2

Table 6
Frame level indicators for the BIP alarm module
LED color
Quantity
Mode
Meaning
red
solid
critical alarm in the frame
red
solid
major alarm in the frame
amber
solid
minor alarm in the frame
amber
10 (2 rows) solid
follow me indicators to attract

attention to the frame under an alarm
condition
See the figure Alarm module of the BIP (page 65).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 9
Alarm module of the BIP
LED test
button
Status LEDs
of the system
Status LEDs
of module
Captive screw
PPT 2822 005 AB
All visual alarms on the BIP alarm module will remain on until the fault
conditions are cleared. When a BIP alarm module LED is lit, an associated
red LED is also lit on the module that has failed. The alarm module LED also
lights when a high temperature alarm for a shelf (not a fabric) is detected.
There is no LED for a high temperature alarm because it is caused from high
ambient air temperature or a clogged air filter, not equipment failure. The
section Hardware alarm definitions (page 66) identifies the hardware
alarms that are indicated on the alarm module. These alarms are also reported
in the software that monitors the operating status and performance of each
Passport 15000 or 20000. (There are many other alarms that are also reported
to the software.)
5.2S2
Hardware alarm definitions

The hardware alarms that are displayed on the front panel of a BIP alarm
module and sometimes of the BIP BIM are given the severity as critical,
major, or minor. Specific hardware actions or conditions trigger a specific
severity. The hardware alarm severities are defined as follows.
Critical indicates that a severe, service-affecting condition has occurred and
immediate corrective action is required. These are examples.
A CP failure causes a loss of call processing capability.
A fabric failure preventing a switchover to a standby (redundant) fabric

card.
Major indicates that a service-affecting condition has occurred and urgent

corrective action is required. Service-affecting conditions include disruption
or degradation of service, or malfunction of an important circuit. These are
examples.
A breaker is tripped.
A breaker has failed, meaning the breaker interface module (BIM) has
failed or the input power to the BIM has failed.
When an Astec MFA150 system of ac rectifiers is the power source and

the external alarm cable assembly P0940531 is connected between it and
the BIP, power to the BIP from one or more rectifiers has failed. Ac or dc
failures are detected by the absence of voltage at the A or B feed of a
function processor (FP). Three red LEDS are lit on the BIP alarm
module. Alarm number 70120050 is reported to the Preside Multiservice
Data Manager software.
When an Astec MFA150 system of ac rectifiers is the power source and

the systems alarm output wires are connected to J2 at the rear of the BIP,
a rectifier or its fan has failed, or an ac or dc breaker on a Helios rectifier
has tripped or been reset.
When a system of ac rectifiers is the power source and the rectifiers

alarm output wires are connected to the central office side of the BIP
alarm module. In this case, a failed breaker alarm is also indicated.
A fan or its controller has failed. A major, as well as a minor, frame-level

alarm is generated.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Minor indicates that a non-service-affecting hardware or software failure has

occurred. Corrective action must be taken to prevent a minor fault from
escalating into a more serious problem. These are examples.
A fan or its controller has failed. A minor, as well as a major, frame-level

alarm is generated.
A shelf temperature is higher than 72 degrees Celsius (161.2 degrees

Fahrenheit).
The BIP alarm module has failed.
BIP alarm LED board

The BIP alarm LED board connects to the alarm backplane. The alarm LED
board indicates
shelf failure
BIP failure
If a fault occurs in either of the nodes connected to the BIP, an alarm is

generated. If physical maintenance at the frame site is necessary, the network
operator can alert a craftsperson to help clear the alarm. The LED indications
on the alarm module assist the craftsperson in locating the correct frame.
LEDs on the alarm module and the cages then direct the craftsperson to the
part that caused the alarm.
The network operator can supply the craftsperson with this information:
the location and part responsible for the fault
a list of possible pieces of equipment at fault
The craftsperson can then use this information with the lit LEDs on the spot
to determine which part to replace.
Amber follow-me lights are located on the BIP. A frame indicator light (aisle
light), provided by the customer, can be connected to the alarm system. The
following lights are designed to guide the technician to the system that
generated the alarm:
Aisle indicator (page 68)
5.2S2
Follow-me indicator (page 68)
In addition, the alarm module provides a bank of 10 LEDs for frame failure
which will come on when any of the other types of alarms are activated.
Aisle indicator
An aisle indicator, located at eye level in the aisle, indicates which row of
nodes or frames contains the problem Passport 15000. The indicator light
must be provided by the customer.
When the external alarm cable P0940531 is connected between the BIP and
an MFA150 system of rectifiers, the aisle indicator trips if a rectifier is
powered off or fails.
Follow-me indicator
A follow-me indicator draws attention from a craftsperson to the frame that
has an alarm. The LEDs at the frame indicate the alarm status of parts of the
system.
Major and minor alarms generated in a system are indicated by the frame
indicator light.
Alarm cable connectors

This section provides the following information about the BIP alarm cable
connectors:
Location of the BIP alarm connectors (page 68)
Functions of the BIP alarm connectors (page 70)
Features of the BIP alarm connectors (page 70)
Location of the BIP alarm connectors

The alarm cable connectors are located at the rear of the BIP backplane on the
lower left side. See the figure Location of alarm cable connectors for two
shelves (page 69).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 10
Location of alarm cable connectors for two shelves
P1 P2
P3
P4 J3 J2 J1
P7
P8
P9
P10
BIP
S3
Sync. A J4
Sync. B J3
Cooling unit
Alarm J2
BIP alarm J1
S2
S1
Alarm/BITS
Temperature
sensor
NTHR55
BIP alarm cable,
upper shelf
Temperature
sensor cable
Power A Power B
Alarm
Upper cooling unit
Lower
cooling unit
Pwr A
Pwr B
Alarm
NTHR57
2 cooling unit
alarm cable
assemblies
NTHR56
BIP alarm cable,
lower shelf
Sync. A J4
Sync. B J3
Cooling unit alarm J2
BIP alarm J1
PPT 2822 001 AD2
5.2S2
Functions of the BIP alarm connectors

The alarm cable connectors provide alarm connectivity from the BIP to each
of the nodes in a frame, and to other frames in the aisle.
Features of the BIP alarm connectors

The features are listed in the table Features of the BIP alarm connectors
(page 70).
Table 7
Label Type of
connector
Feature
P1
15-pin D-sub,
high density
interface for access by a craftsperson for connecting

external telephone and data jacks when the BIP is in
a DMS-100 office environment
P2
25-pin D-sub,
high density
interface for office alarms to link or daisy-chain

adjacent BIPs according to the DMS-100 office
alarm scheme; used with connector J1 for an end-ofaisle lamp
P3
26-pin D-sub,
high density
interface for stand-alone office alarms to connect a

remote external alarm scanner in a stand-alone
alarm environment (for example, to monitor the
frame using an OEM scanner); for maximum
flexibility, the connection is isolated form C (dry)
contacts; the maximum is 100 mA/20 V
P4
25-pin D-sub,
high density
interface for office alarms the same as connector P2
P5
110-pin
inside for the alarm module, not available for use
P6
55-pin
inside for the alarm module, not available for use
(Sheet 1 of 2)
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Table 7 (continued)
Label Type of
connector
Feature
P7,
P8,
P9,
P10
interfaces for shelf alarms such that:
26-pin D-sub,
high density
P7 is for the bottom cage of the lower shelf

P8 is unconnected
P9 is for the bottom cage of the upper shelf
P10 is unconnected
Unconnected connections will not generate alarms.
J1
1x2 MATE-NLOK with

louvertec
contacts
for aisle lamp output when the BIP is at the end of a

lineup; must be used with connectors P2 and P4, or
if the drive is still needed, their pin 19 must be
connected to L +ABS on BIP connector P2 or P4
J2
1x4 Berg
(pin 1 is at the
top position on
the BIP, pin 4
at the bottom)
for use if external power equipment is to be

monitored; the equipment must have isolated form C
(dry) alarm contacts; the alarm is generated on
contact closure; see BIP alarm connections from a
system of ac rectifiers (page 71)
J3
2x4 Berg
large fail indicator (frame or follow-me) for the

module when the view of the indicators are blocked
(for example, by cabinet doors); for driving a front
and rear LED board
(Sheet 2 of 2)
The installation and pinout of each BIP alarm connector is described in

241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Installation, Maintenance
and Upgrade.
BIP alarm connections from a system of ac rectifiers

When a system of ac rectifiers, such as an Astec MFA150 power system,
rectifiers is used to power a Passport 15000 or 20000, external alarms can be
connected between the two setups. Selected alarm connections can indicate a
hardware status at the Passport 15000 or 20000, while other selected alarm
connections at the Passport 15000 or 20000 can indicate a hardware status at
5.2S2
the rectifier system. Since Nortel Networks supports the use of an Astec
MFA150 power system, this section indicates the possible alarm connections
at both ends.
When the BIP receives an alarm failure output from the rectifier of Astec
MFA150 power system, it is a major alarm that indicates one or more of the
following has occurred.
One or more rectifiers has failed.
One or more rectifier fans has failed.
An ac failure occurred.
An ac breaker was tripped or manually reset.
A dc failure occurred.
A dc breaker was tripped or manually reset.
The alarm cable connection end points between an MFA150 controller card
and a BIP are identified in the table Pin-to-pin connections between an
MFA150 controller card and a BIP (page 72). When the cable is connected
and the system is operating normally, a failed rectifier generates critical alarm
70120050 that is reported to the network management software called Preside
Multiservice Data Manager (if present).
Table 8
Pin-to-pin connections between an MFA150 controller card and a BIP
At the MFA150
At the BIP Type of

alarm
terminal block TB2:

J2, pin 2,
pin 1 for the black wire,
Lpins 2 and 4 for the red wire,
no connection (NC) for the white and green wires
major
For the description of BIP alarm connector J2, see Features of the BIP alarm
connectors (page 70).
241-1501-200 5.2S2
The installation of the alarm cables for terminal block 2 (TB2) at the MFA150
are in Astecs document 167-9021-133 Advanced Power Systems MFA150
Modular Front Access Power System Detailed Installation Guidelines and
Procedures Manual.
The prefabricated MFA-to-BIP external alarm cable assembly has part
number P0940531. The installation of the cable and the pinout of the alarm
connector are described in 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware
Installation, Maintenance and Upgrade.
Power connections to and from the BIP backplane

Whether your site uses the top or bottom method of installing power cables,
the BIP accommodates
directly routing the cable from the site power source, or a branch panel
as the last leg of connection, to the breaker interface panel (BIP) of the
Passport 15000 or 20000
using a cable tapped off a main power cable (instead of directly from the
site power source) as the last leg of cable to the BIP
including electrical conduit hardware with the power cables
using the optional power-and-ground assembly at the rear of the BIP
This section includes the following information about the BIP backplane and
the backplane power input connections:
Location of the BIP backplane power connections (page 73)
Function of the BIP backplane power input connections (page 74)
Hardware for connecting power input cables to the BIP (page 75)
Function of the BIP backplane power output connections (page 79)
Location of the BIP backplane power connections

The BIP backplane power connections are located along the right side of the
rear of the BIP. A strain-relief bar is located directly in front of the power
connections. This bar is used to prevent heavy input power cables from
placing too much stress on the BIP backplane.
5.2S2
The power input connections located on the BIP backplane are shown in the
figure Rear of the BIP (page 53).
The power output connections located on the BIP backplane are shown in the
figures
Location of power output cable connectors at rear of two shelves

(page 82)
Backplane connections at the BIP (page 81)
Function of the BIP backplane power input connections

The BIP backplane power connections are the terminations for input power
feeds up to 100 A, and for output power cables from the BIP to the shelves
and cooling units. A four-BIM model BIP supports four input feeds (a battery
and battery return wire per BIM), while a two-BIM model supports two power
feeds (four cables). A backplane safety cover overlays the backplane to
prevent inadvertent shorts from metallic contact with the connectors. Each
power input connection is covered by an insulating boot.
Each Passport 15000 or 20000 in the same NEBS 2000 frame requires four
power cables (two feeds) through the same BIP.
Installing top power cabling involves routing four or eight cables (two or four
feeds) from the dc power source along an overhead trough (or equivalent
setup) and down to the BIP.
Installing bottom power cabling involves routing four or eight cables (two or
four feeds) from the site dc power source under or through the floor and up to
the BIP.
Installing the feeds through conduit or not depends on the access
classification of your site as restricted or non-restricted. For information on
classifications, see 241-1501-205 Passport 15000, 20000 Site Requirements
and Preparation Guide.
The table BIP backplane power connections in a dual shelf frame (page 75)
shows how the power connections on the backplane of the BIP are connected
to other parts in the Passport 15000 frame setup.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Table 9
BIP backplane power connections in a dual shelf frame
BIM
Connector
Connects to
A1
P15
PIM 15RU lower shelf
P16
cooling unit lower shelf
P17
PIM 7RU lower shelf
P 18
PIM 15RL lower shelf
P19
lower cooling unit
P20
PIM 7RL lower shelf
P21
PIM 15RU upper shelf
P22
upper cooling unit
P23
PIM 7RU upper shelf
P24
PIM 15RL upper shelf
P25
upper cooling unit
P26
PIM 7RL upper shelf
B1
A2
B2
Hardware for connecting power input cables to the BIP

The cables that input power to the rear of the breaker interface panel (BIP)
can be connected by one of the following methods.
directly to the studs on the rear of the BIP
indirectly through one of the power-and-ground assemblies (described in

Using an optional power-and-ground assembly (page 76))
See the figure Backplane connections at the BIP (page 81). The power input
connections include the following parts for each BIM:
one pair of studs for connecting one dc power input cable and one return,
that is, one feed
one power input stud with an anti-rotation mate for each 2-hole lug
5.2S2
one lug per pair of studs that is a 90-degree offset narrow-tongued 2-hole
lug sized No. 2/0 AWG; the lug is oversized so that it accommodates the
different thicknesses of 1/0 AWG (53.49 mm2) cable by various
manufacturers, for example, with a 0.625 pitch
Note: When using power input cables that are thinner than 1/0 AWG, you
must provide lugs matched to the cable gauge. When powering from an
Astec MFA150 power system of ac rectifiers, the appropriately sized lugs
for power cable installation are specified for the installation.
one insulating boot per pair of studs to safely cover the studs, the end of
the 1/0 AWG cable, and the lug
Note: When using power input cables that are thinner than 1/0 AWG, the
same insulating boot is used and the gap is addressed by the procedure to
connect each cable.
Using an optional power-and-ground assembly

The power-and-ground assemblies enable the connection of power input
cables ranging in size from No 6 AWG (13.3 mm2) to 2/0 AWG (67.43 mm2),
and enables using cable that is much less flexible than Super Flex. There is a
polyvalent version (part number A0834143) and an equivalent version (part
number A0834149) for the European Telecommunications Standards
Institutes (ETSI). Both versions are identical in purpose and function. The
mounting bracket of either assembly fits a NEBS 2000 frame, that is, a
21-inch wide mounting apparatus.
Each power-and-ground assembly includes:
four pairs of terminal blocks along a rail, one per breaker interface panel
(BIM); the uneven spacing is normal
a bridge between the frame ground terminal and the adjacent battery
return terminal (only on the ETSI terminal blocks)
from each bridge, one ground cable ended with a straight 2-hole lug
(ETSI only)
at the top of the left and right terminal blocks, a clamping screw into the
openings for the cables
a blank label to identify the cable connection for each terminal block
241-1501-200 5.2S2
eight 2/0 AWG (67.4 mm2) Super Flex excelene cables rated as (R)
+105C 600V (manufactured by Essex), two per BIM, connecting the
terminal blocks to the BIP power input studs
each cable has a 90-degree offset narrow-tongued 2-hole lug
At each set of three ETSI terminal blocks on the power-and-ground assembly:
the top of the left block receives a power input cable from the site power
source, while the bottom has a power output cable to the BIP
the top of the middle block has a ground cable to fasten to a frame ground
the top of the right block receives a power input cable from the site power
source, while the bottom has a power output cable to the BIP
A power-and-ground assembly must be added to the switch hardware on site.

The polyvalent or an ETSI assembly has a row of four unevenly spaced
terminal blocks mounted on a flat metal bar. The bar is to be fastened to the
frame uprights. An ETSI assembly has three terminal blocks per set instead
of two. See the figures:
The polyvalent power-and-ground assembly A0834143 (page 78)
The ETSI power-and-ground assembly A0834149 (page 79)
All the site power cable preparation criteria up to the rear of the BIP also
apply to a polyvalent or an ETSI power-and-ground cable assembly.
Adding a power-and-ground assembly in the field means either
adding the assembly to the NEBS 2000 frame as an initial installation

before the input power feeds are connected to the BIP
adding the assembly after the Passport 15000 or 20000 has been powered
up with feeds connected directly to the BIP
5.2S2

Figure 11
The polyvalent power-and-ground assembly A0834143
Mounting
bracket of
power-and-ground
assembly
Power input
cables
Rear frame
upright
Rear
of BIP
Strain-relief
bar
PIM
Cable
fastening
screw
Terminal
block
Super-Flex
power
input cable
Insulation
boot
PPT 2997 005 AD
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 12
The ETSI power-and-ground assembly A0834149
Mounting
bracket of ETSI
power-and-ground
assembly
Ground cable
fastened behind the
mounting bracket
Rear frame
upright
Power input
cables
Rear
of BIP
Strain-relief
bar
PIM
Cable
fastening
screws
Terminal
block
Super-Flex
power
input cable
Insulation
boot
PPT 2997 006 AA
Function of the BIP backplane power output connections

The power output connections at the BIP distribute the input power from the
A and B feeds to the Passport 15000 shelf or shelves and the cooling unit or
units. Each breaker interface module (BIM) is connected through the BIP
backplane to a group of output connections. The group includes a connection
to each PIM of a shelf and a connection to that shelfs cooling unit. See the
figure Backplane connections at the BIP (page 81). The paired BIMs for
each shelf provide redundant power to each shelf and its cooling unit.
5.2S2
The power output cables from the rear of the BIP to the parts of the shelf
include:
two 1x4 MATE-N-LOK II connectors with louvertec contacts for cables

providing power output to the PIMs in the shelves
one 1x2 MATE-N-LOK II connector with louvertec contacts for cables

providing power output to either the upper or lower cooling unit
The power output cable assemblies are always installed for both shelves even
if only one is mounted in a NEBS 2000 frame. For the cable connection
points, see the figure Location of power output cable connectors at rear of
two shelves (page 82).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 13
Backplane connections at the BIP
P24 connection from BIM B2

to PIM on the upper shelf
Cooling unit
cable connection
P26 connection from
BIM B2 to the PIM
on upper shelf
Insulating boot of
power input cable
PPT 2820 035 AD
5.2S2

Figure 14
Location of power output cable connectors at rear of two shelves
NTHR53
power cables,
upper shelf
P17
P16
P20
P19
P18
P15
P26
P23
P25
P22
P21
P24
NTHR54
power cables,
lower shelf
BIP
A1
B1
S3
S2
A2
B2
S1
Alarm/BITS
PIMs
NTHR66
2 cooling unit
power cable
assemblies
Power A Power B
Upper cooling unit
Lower
cooling unit
Alarm
Power A
Power B
Alarm
PIMs
PPT 2822 001 AC2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Sources of dc input power to the BIP backplane

The breaker interface panel (BIP) of a Passport 15000 receives and distributes
dc power for the system. The source of dc power can be from either:
a dc power setup for the building or room of operation at the site
co-located ac rectifiers, for example, when using an Astec MFA150

power system
Most of the preparations and requirements for dc power cabling between the
MFA150 rectifiers and the BIP of the Passport 15000 have the same criteria
as cabling from a site dc power plant. For information of this kind, see
Guide.
Powering the BIP from ac rectifiers

The BIP can be powered from any system of ac rectifiers that provides the
power, safety, and performance required to operate one or two Passport 15000
or 20000 shelves (not a combination). Nortel Networks recommends using
one of the configurations of the Astec MFA150 power system of rectifiers.
The system is manufactured by Astec Advanced Power Systems. Consult
your Nortel Networks sales representative for the available equipment. For an
example, see the figure MFA150 power system of five rectifiers for a dual
shelf configuration (page 84).
One configuration provides up to 100 A of dc power with 25 A of redundancy
for two Passport 15000 or 20000 shelves (50 A per shelf). Another
configuration provides 50 A of dc power with 25 A of redundancy for one
Passport 15000 or 20000 shelf. Both configurations support n+1 redundant
sparing of power output.
The MFA150 system consists of an integrated distribution and control panel
and one or two rectifier shelves. Optional parts include an external battery
return panel and a battery disconnect panel. Supplementary distribution and
battery trays can also be added. The system may be engineered on a standard
59-cm (23-inch) relay rack or in a special wall-mounted enclosure.
To plan for the installation of an Astec MFA150 power system of ac rectifiers,
refer to 241-1501-205 Passport 15000, 20000 Site Requirements and
Preparation Guide.
5.2S2

Figure 15
MFA150 power system of five rectifiers for a dual shelf configuration
Anti-shear panel
Rack
Controller
Rectifier
Anchor
Anchor opening
PPT 2997 001 AB
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Grounding the Passport and interworking equipment

The NEBS 2000 frame is the grounding point for the switch hardware. The
frame has a silvery grounding strip bonded to the front of each frame upright
and across the top front. Mounting any Passport equipment onto the frame
using the provided self-tapping bolts automatically grounds it to the frame.
The NEBS 2000 frame is to be grounded to the site ground window using a
cable with a straight two-hole lug from a top front or top rear pair of predrilled unthreaded holes through the silvery strip. Grounding the frame to the
site ground window grounds all equipment mounted onto the frame.
Any optional Passport or non-Passport equipment that is connected to or
interworks with the hardware of a Passport must share the same ground
window even if the equipment is mounted in different mounting apparatuses.
5.2S2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
87
Chapter 3
Shelf assembly
A NEBS 2000 frame supports two shelf nodes, an upper and a lower. Each
shelf node is a separate Passport 15000 or 20000. A shelf node is mostly
comprised of the power distribution unit, the cooling unit, and a shelf
assembly. A shelf assembly accommodates:
plug-in processor cards or filler cards in two rows (cages) across the front
a cable management channel across the front
the identification logo of the Passport model on the cover of the upper
cable management channel since the front of a Passport 20000 appears to
be the same as a Passport 15000; (on some earlier models of
Passport 15000, the cable cover is blank)
two plug-in fabrics across its rear
plug-in modules at the rear for power input, hardware alarms, external
timing interfaces, and the MAC address
the temperature sensors on an upper shelf for the upper cooling unit
supporting the cooling fans which dissipate the heat generated by the
Passport 15000 or 20000
an ESD jack to plug a wrist strap into
The card slot numbers are sequential through both cages. The cages hold the
processor cards which manage the node and provide physical interfaces for
connection to high-speed data networks. The parts which make up the shelf
assembly allow the processor cards to
inter-communicate (across both card cages)

5.2S2
88 Chapter 3 Shelf assembly
support alarm, timing, and node addressing
A module is different from a card because it requires no software

configuration and has no connected signaling (traffic) cables. All modules are
installed at the rear of the shelf assembly. A fabric card is the only rear card
and the only card without signaling cables. Replacing a rear card or module
in a Passport 15000 or 20000 affects performance depending on whether it
has a redundant mate (backup). Each replacement procedure minimizes the
amount of time a card or module or a backup is out of service.
The software term shelf refers to the node rather than the shelf assembly. The
term shelf assembly refers to the hardware part of a shelf node that contains
the plug-in modules and processor cards.
These sections describe the hardware parts that constitute a single
Passport 15000 or 20000 shelf assembly:
Common backplane (page 92)
Fabric cards (page 94)
Power interface modules (PIMs) (page 107)
Media access control (MAC) address module (page 112)
Alarm/BITS module (page 114)
Cooling units (page 126)
The exterior parts of the shelf assembly are shown in the figures
A typical shelf assembly, front view (page 89)
A shelf assembly of a Passport 15000 without fabrics, rear view

(page 90)
A shelf assembly of a Passport 20000 with one fabric removed, rear

view (page 91)
For information about installing or maintaining any of the shelf parts

described in this section, see 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Chapter 3 Shelf assembly 89

Figure 16
A typical shelf assembly, front view
Filler
FPs
CPs
Latch
Cable
management
channel,
cover closed
Latch
Passport
model identifier
Status LEDs
Mounting
holes for bolts
Filler
FPs
Cable
management
channel,
cover open
ESD jack
Cable guides
Cover latch
plate
PPT 2820 036 AA2
5.2S2

Figure 17
Opening
for PIM cable
PIM
Backplane
Cable
management
bracket
MAC
address module
For fabric
Alarm/BITS
module
For fabric cover
hinge pegs
Kickplate
PPT 2820 037 AB
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 18
A shelf assembly of a Passport 20000 with one fabric removed, rear view
Transportation notch for

cover hinge bushing
Alignment grooves
for fabric cover
hinge sleeve
Opening for PIM cable

For transportation strap
PIM
Backplane
Cable management bracket
For a fabric
MAC address module
Alarm/BITS module
PIM
Transportation strap
Fabric cover
PPT 3087 008 AA2
5.2S2
Common backplane
This section provides the following information about the shelf assembly
common backplane:
Backplane location and physical description (page 92)
Function of the common backplane (page 93)
The backplane can also be considered a midplane since cards can be inserted
on both sides.
Backplane location and physical description

The backplane is located at the rear of the shelf assembly between the
processor cards and the fabrics. The backplane spans both card cages and
extends over the full height and width of the shelf. The backplane is not a
field-replaceable unit. The location of the backplane is shown in the figure:

(page 90)
A shelf assembly of a Passport 20000 with one fabric removed, rear

view (page 91)
The backplane of a Passport 15000 is a 20-layer printed circuit board

containing 8 signal layers and 12 power/ground layers. Each processor card
connects to the backplane with 4 Z-PACK connectors with a total of 658 pins
per processor card slot, plus additional pins for the fabric card, MAC address
module, alarm/BITS module, and the power interface modules (PIMs).
Compliant pins are mechanically inserted in the backplane with a friction fit.
The backplane circuit board itself contains no active electronic parts.
The backplane of a Passport 20000 is a 20-layer printed circuit board
containing 10 signal layers, 12 ground, and 2 power layers. Each processor
card connects to the backplane with 4 Z-PACK connectors and 2 power
connectors with a total of 658 pins per processor card slot. This includes pins
for the fabric card, MAC address module, alarm/BITS module, and the power
interface modules (PIMs). Compliant pins are mechanically inserted in the
backplane with a friction fit. The backplane circuit board itself contains no
active electronic parts.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Function of the common backplane

The backplane is referred to as the common backplane because it is the point
across which all processor cards and fabric cards in a shelf intercommunicate.
In a Passport 15000, the backplane provides redundant 3.52 Gbits/s serial
links between the processor cards and the fabric cards to support power and
signal distribution. The high-speed lines on the backplane have a nominal
impedance of 50 ohm and 100 ohm differential to reduce signal ringing and
reflections caused by impedance mismatches. The serial link architecture of
the backplane allows for hot-swapping packs by isolating each card to a single
fabric port, preventing card failures from propagating through the switching
fabric. The backplane also provides links between adjacent FPs for functions
such as sparing, clock distribution, and distribution of -48/-60 V dc.
In a Passport 20000, the backplane provides redundant serial links or
Unilinks between the processor cards and the fabric cards to support power
and signal distribution. The Passport 20000 has the 3.52 Gbits/s link
capability of the Passport 15000 and adds an overlay of 16.0 Gbits/s of link
capability. Only one capability is active per slot. The high-speed lines on the
backplane have a nominal impedance of 50 ohm and 100 ohm differential to
reduce signal ringing and reflections caused by impedance mismatches. The
serial link architecture of the backplane allows for hot-swapping packs by
isolating each card to a single fabric port, preventing card failures from
propagating through the switching fabric.
The backplane also provides links between adjacent FPs for functions such as
sparing and clock distribution. The backplane has layers dedicated to power
distribution of -48/-60 V dc to all plug-in cards and modules.
The backplane can function in dual- or single-fabric mode. Traffic is typically
loadshared through the backplane across both fabrics. Dual-fabric mode is the
standard mode used by the Passport 15000 or 20000. Single-fabric mode
occurs while one of the fabrics is being replaced or upgraded.
5.2S2
Fabric cards
This section contains the following information about the fabric cards:
Fabric card carrier (page 94)
Fabric card transportation (page 97)
Fabric card location and physical description (page 98)
Function and operation of the fabric cards (page 101)
Fabric LED behavior is different from FPs (page 104)
Fabric replacement can affect traffic (page 104)
Fabric replacement can affect system cooling (page 105)
Fabric replacement may need a firmware upgrade (page 106)
Fabric card carrier

Each shelf assembly contains two fabrics. each fabric is enclosed in a carrier
module. The carrier protects the fabric card, provides EMC compliance, and
provides a mechanism for inserting the card.
The figure Faceplates of both fabrics installed in a lower Passport 15000
(page 95) shows the position of the fabrics in a Passport 15000.
The figure Faceplates of both fabrics installed in a lower Passport 20000
(page 96) shows the position of the fabrics in a Passport 20000.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 19
Faceplates of both fabrics installed in a lower Passport 15000
ESD jack
Rear (lower)
cooling unit
Fabric cover
Fabric status
LEDs
Fabric lever
Insertion
alignment
arrows
Access panel
to diagnostic
connector
(For Nortel
Networks
personnel)
Fabric cover
Fabric status
LEDs
Fabric lever
Access panel
to diagnostic
connector
Captive
screws
ESD jack
Air filter cover
PPT 2819 014 AC
5.2S2

Figure 20
Faceplates of both fabrics installed in a lower Passport 20000
ESD jack
Rear (lower)
cooling unit
Fabric cover
Fabric handle
Fabric handle
MAC address
module
Alarm/BITS
module
Fabric status
LEDs
Captive screw
of fabric lever
Fabric lever
ESD jack
Captive screw
Air filter cover
PPT 3087 009 AB
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Fabric card transportation

The method of transporting fabric cards differs between a Passport 15000 and
20000.
Each fabric of a Passport 15000 is shipped in its own transportation container.
The container and packaging protects the card from damage by minor impacts
and electromagnetic discharges (ESD).
Each fabric card of a Passport 20000 is strapped into a transportation position
against the rear of the shelf assembly. During transportation, the card
connectors are not engaged with the backplane. The outer card carrier
provides protection from ESD. After the NEBS 2000 frame or equivalent
mounting apparatus is anchored to the floor and the switch hardware is
fastened to that apparatus, removing the transportation strap allows the fabric
to be seated. Store the strap for re-use in case the shelf assembly is ever moved
from its position. See the figure Transportation strap of a Passport 20000
fabric (page 98).
The transportation strap for a fabric (part number P0936800) is not supposed
to be mounted on an in-service system because having to remove it to replace
a fabric will delay removal of the fabric. Replacing a fabric is a time-sensitive
task.
Put the strap aside for re-use whenever the shelf assembly is to be moved with
a fabric in the transportation position. Always keep a hand on the fabric to
ensure it stays against the shelf assembly.
Note: When the shelf assembly is shipped in its own container as part of
a shelf-based package (for example, NTQH03), the fabric is also shipped
in its own container. This makes the shelf assembly weigh less for
handling during installation into the mounting apparatus.
Each Passport 20000 in the upper position of a NEBS 2000 frame is shipped
with temporary protective tape covering the air vent of the fabric cage. If the
tape is not removed before initially powering up the node, the accumulated
heat that is trapped against the fabrics can exceed each fabrics temperature
threshold. When the threshold is exceeded, the fabric drops its traffic until the
temperature goes below the threshold. Built-in hysteresis prevents the fabric
from toggling between on and off at the temperature threshold. A shelf
5.2S2
assembly in the lower position of a NEBS 2000 frame does not have the strip
of tape. A shelf assembly from package NTQS03 or NTQS04 may not have
the tape on it. Removing the protective tape is an essential step of the
installation procedure.
Figure 21
Transportation strap of a Passport 20000 fabric
The longer tab fastens

at the middle of the shelf
assembly between the MAC
address module and the
alarm/BITS module
Padding
Captive
screws
PPT 3087 005 AA2
Fabric card location and physical description

Each Passport 15000 or 20000 shelf assembly houses two fabric cards,
located one above the other at the rear of the shelf assembly. The fabric in the
upper position is referred to by the software as fabric X, while the lower is
fabric Y.
Each fabric is an individual switch embedded in a chip set.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Passport 15000 fabrics

In a Passport 15000 the upper and lower fabric cards are rotated 180 degrees
relative to each other to minimize serial link lengths. The figure Faceplates
of both fabrics installed in a lower Passport 15000 (page 95) shows the
fabrics rotated.
Each Passport 15000 fabric provides 16 input and 16 output DASL ports at
3.52 Gbits/s bandwidth for each port. The fabric capacity is 56 Gbits/s while
the shelf (usable) capacity using that fabric is 40 Gbits/s. The 40G fabric
supports the 2.5 Gbits/s function processors (FPs).
The table The features of a 40 Gbits/s fabric (page 99) lists the major
features of a Passport 15000 fabric.
Table 10
The features of a 40 Gbits/s fabric
Feature
Description
throughput capacity
56.32 Gbits/s (40 Gbits/s shelf capacity) from 2

fabrics each with 40 Gbits/s operating at half
capacity in load-sharing (redundant) mode for a
total shelf capacity of 40 Gbits/s
port configuration
16 x 16 non-blocking
base speed per port
3.52 Gbits/s
self routing
yes
multicast, broadcast
yes
flow control
grant
shared memory depth
256 or 512 cells
QoS support
Passport 15000 uses 2 priorities
DASL interface
440 Mbits/s
JTAG
yes
technology
CMOS5S6, 0.35 Um
5.2S2
Passport 20000 fabrics

In a Passport 20000 the fabrics are both installed with the same way
orientation. (This is different than a Passport 15000.)
The fabric capacity is 112 Gbits/s each while the shelf capacity using that
fabric is 70 Gbits/s. Shelf capacity is the portion that is available to traffic.
Each fabric provides 16 input ports and 16 output ports. Both fabrics connect
to the 16 processor cards (2 CP3s and 14 FPs) in the shelf using one of two
types of serial link ports:
DASL for a 3.52 Gbits/s full duplex connection used by the 2.5 Gbits/s
FPs
Unilink for a 16 Gbits/s full duplex connection in preparation for use by

the upcoming 10 Gbits/s FPs
Each 70G fabric provides up to 16 ports in a combination of DASL and

Unilink ports with a maximum of 4 Unilink ports. For example, the
combination can be 4 Unilinks and 12 DASLs, or 3 Unilinks and 13 DASLs.
DASL connections are used by the function processors (FPs) that have ASIC
devices called CPAC1 or CPAC2. Unilink connections will be used by the FPs
that have the C192 ASICs. (The ASICs of each FP type are identified in
241-5701-615 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 FP Configuration Reference.)
Card slots 6 and 7 or 14 and 15 can accommodate FPs that use either DASL
or Unilink. All other slots accommodate DASL. The slots are paired so that
they can be configured for card-to-card sparing.
The 70G fabric supports both the 2.5 Gbits/s FPs and the 10 Gbits/s (C192)
FPs. The 10G FPs must be installed in the Unilink slots.
The table The features of a 70 Gbits/s fabric (page 101) lists the major
features of a Passport 20000 fabric.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Table 11
The features of a 70 Gbits/s fabric
Feature
Description
throughput capacity
112.6 Gbits/s (70 Gbits/s shelf capacity) from 2

fabrics each with 70 Gbits/s operating at half
capacity in load-sharing (redundant) mode for a
total shelf capacity of 70 Gbits/s
port configuration
16 x 16 non-blocking
base speed per port
4.0 Gbits/s and 16.0 Gbits/s for the four slots when
10 G cards are installed
self routing
yes
multicast, broadcast
yes
flow control
grant
shared memory depth
256 or 512 cells
QoS support
Passport 20000 uses 2 priorities
DASL interface
3.52 Gbits/s
Unilink interface
16 Gbits/s
JTAG
yes
technology
CMOS5S6, 0.35 Um
Function and operation of the fabric cards

The fabric cards provide the shelf with two redundant 16x16 switching
elements for interconnecting up to 16 processor cards. Both fabrics balance
and load-share traffic. Each one operates at about half capacity so that it can
take over the traffic of its mate. Either fabric can handle all traffic carried by
a fully provisioned and configured Passport 15000 or 20000 switch.
Under normal operation, each processor card transmits to and receives from
half the processors on the upper fabric (the X fabric in software) and half on
the lower fabric (the Y fabric). When the control processor (CP) detects a
fault in a fabric, or when the fabric is manually locked, the CP blocks all new
5.2S2
traffic to that fabric and reroutes its established traffic to the unlocked fabric.
When all traffic in progress is established on the fabric that is taking over the
full load, the locking of the fabric completes.
The fabrics are hot-swappable. When the software is prepared for the removal
by manually locking the fabric X or Y in software, and then returning the
replacement to service by the manually unlocking it, traffic in progress on the
fabrics is maintained. When hot-swapping a fabric without locking it in
software the traffic in progress on the removed fabric is lost and the inserted
fabric is automatically tested and returned to service provided the tests pass.
Unlocking a fabric returns it to service. The CP allows new traffic to use the
fabric. Traffic that was transferred to the other fabric is transferred back so
that balanced load sharing resumes.
The internal port-to-card mapping of the 70G fabrics is different from the 40G
fabrics (and their physical connectors to the backplane are different). This
means a 40G fabric cannot be used in a Passport 20000, and a 70G cannot be
used in a Passport 15000. When the system first detects which type of fabric
it has, the system automatically:
knows how to treat the fabric, that is, as two 40Gs of a Passport 15000 or
two 70Gs of a Passport 20000
compares the firmware versions between the pre-loaded firmware on the

fabric and in the software load on the system and flags any discrepancy
adjusts the port-to-card mapping between the fabrics and the processor
cards (transparent to the end-user)
updates the system with the total fabric capacity of the shelf
For Passport 15000 or 20000, each of the 16 links to the fabric supports
3.52 Gbit/s bi-directional data rate per link or 2.5 Gbit/s user data rate. The
fabric data rate is greater than the user date rate for two key reasons:
bandwidth reserved to accommodate internal cell headers
fabric speedup to provide non-blocking architecture
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Passport 15000 or 20000 use fixed 68 byte cells or packets in the fabric route
between the processor cards. The figure Passport fabric cell (page 103)
shows the cell formats and encapsulation. It encapsulates the following:
3 bytes for switch routing header
64 bytes for Passport proprietary cell
1 byte for CRC (cyclic redundancy check) to protect payload
Figure 22
Passport fabric cell
CRC of
Passport cell
CRC of
Passport cell
Switch Routing
header
CRC of Passport cell

Switch
0 1 Routing
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 .... 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
a) header
a)
Passport header
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 .... 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 .... 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
b) Passport header
b)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 .... 56
57 58 59
60 61 62 63
Multicast
address
(if ATM cell only)
ATM header
Multicast address
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 .... 58(if59
ATM cell only)
c)
ATM header
c)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 .... 58 59
Zero padding
a) Fabric cell
Zero padding
b) Passport proprietary cell

c) ATM cell
Control cell
Control cell
PPT 3161 001 AA

PPT 3161 001 AA
5.2S2
For more information about the operation of fabrics, see the chapter on fabrics
in 241-5701-600 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Configuration Guide.
Passport 15000 fabrics are installed in opposite orientations relative to each
other (unlike Passport 20000). Orient installing a fabric by using the insertion
alignment arrows that are labeled onto each Passport 15000 fabric and the
middle of the shelf assembly. Passport 20000 fabrics are installed in the same
orientation relative to each other.
Fabric LED behavior is different from FPs

Since a red LED can be caused by more than disabling, a fabric with a red
LED can still be transmitting traffic. Similarly, a fabric with a green LED
might be prevented from transmitting traffic. To handle these unusual fabric
behaviors, and to prevent uncontrolled errors from hot-swapping an unlocked
fabric, always manually lock a fabric and allow time for the transfer of
connections before physically removing it from a shelf, and unlock it as soon
as a replacement is seated.
For the complete pattern of fabric LED behaviors, refer toStatus LEDs of a
fabric in a Passport 15000 (page 352) or Status LEDs of a fabric in a
Passport 20000 (page 354).
Fabric replacement can affect traffic

When both fabrics of a Passport 15000 or 20000 are in service, they operate
in a load-sharing mode such that either fabric can take over all the traffic of
its mate. When a fabric fails completely, the failure triggers the remaining
fabric to take over the incoming load of the failed fabric and the failed failure
is put into a lock-out state. Traffic in progress is unavoidably lost during the
switchover.
When the system removes a fabric from service (disables it), it puts the fabric
in a lock-out state, but it does not automatically lock it in software. Prior to
removing a fabric from a shelf assembly, you must always manually lock the
fabric in software. (This is not the same as the lock-out state of a failed fabric.)
Locking the target fabric allows a takeover of traffic by its mate and prepares
the system to allow returning the replacement fabric to service. Without
manual locking, the system cannot put the replacement fabric into service.
Manually unlocking the fabric triggers the return to service, but the lock
command had to have been used first.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
If the fabric you must replace still has traffic passing through it, then the traffic
in progress can be maintained through its redundant mate provided that mate
is in service and operating normally. Traffic is maintained by manually
locking the target fabric so that the mate fabric takes over its traffic.
Replacing a fabric that has no in-service mate causes all CPs and FPs to reset.
A reset loses all traffic in progress. The CPs and FPs will not reboot until a
fabric is installed and returns to service.
For a description of handling fabric software sparing, takeover, and lockout,
refer to 241-5701-600 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Configuration Guide.
Fabric replacement can affect system cooling

An installed fabric is an integral part of the cooling system and
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). The duration of replacing a fabric
affects the cooling system and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
CAUTION
Risk of service loss or equipment damage
Removing a fabric for an extended period of time affects

the cooling systems capability to maintain a nominal
temperature of operation inside the Passport 15000 or
20000. The period of time varies according to the ambient
temperature of the room. See the table Durations for
replacing a fabric (page 105).
Table 12
Durations for replacing a fabric
Ambient room temperature
Interval between
removing and inserting
25 degrees Celsius (77 degrees Fahrenheit)
20 minutes
8 minutes
3 minutes
5.2S2
Before removing a fabric, ensure that the cooling unit of the switch is
operating with all three fans at normal speeds. If at least one fan is not
operating at normal speed, see 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000
Hardware Installation, Maintenance and Upgrade.
Fabric replacement may need a firmware upgrade

A fabric card stores fixed firmware from the factory, and can be loaded with
additional firmware after being seated into an operating Passport 15000 or
20000. Once the writable memory bank is loaded, for example, with version
9.3, it automatically becomes active and controls the operation of the fabric
card. For information on installing new firmware on the fabric card, see
241-5701-272 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Software Upgrade.
An upgrade to fabric card firmware occurs independently of software
upgrades to the function processors (FPs) and control processors (CPs). All
Passport software is compatible with all fabric card firmware. Some versions
of fabric firmware can include enhanced or new functionality to increase
efficiency. For example, the software package called fabric_CB02A is used
by PCR 2.2 GA software and contains the fabric firmware. The B refers to the
2 in PCR 2.x, the 02 refers to the .2 in PCR 2.2, and the A refers to GA.
CB02S1A would refer to the first software supplement for PCR 2.2 GA
software. Both fabric_CB02A and fabric_CB02S1A use the same firmware.
When inserting a version of a fabric with a product engineering code (PEC)
that is different than the fabric being replaced, the replacement may require a
different firmware load to be downloaded from the software distribution site
(SDS). When a new fabric is installed, the system software prompts the
operator to upgrade the firmware to a specific version if that version is not
already running. Information about fabric firmware is described in
241-5701-600 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Configuration Guide. The work
flow for installing new fabric card firmware is identified in 241-5701-272
Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Software Upgrade.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Power interface modules (PIMs)

The power interface modules (PIMs) pass power from the breaker interface
panel (BIP) into the shelf assembly. This section provides the following
information about the PIMs:
Location and physical description of the PIMs (page 107)
PIM faceplate (page 107)
PIM cable assembly (page 110)
Power LED status indicators for PIMs (page 110)
PIM cable assembly (page 110)
Location and physical description of the PIMs

Four power interface modules (PIMs) are located along the left side of the
rear of the shelf assembly. See the figure A shelf assembly of a
Passport 15000 without fabrics, rear view (page 90).
Each PIM provides a point at which power cables from the BIP are connected.
Each shelf assembly contains four PIMs: two for A power feeds and two for
B feeds. See Function of the BIP backplane power input connections
(page 74) for more information about how input power feeds from the BIP are
routed to each shelf. Each PIM provides separate power filtering for the
portions of the shelf it supports. The PIMs also provide termination for the
shelf clocks and for the secondary control bus.
The PIM is a field-replaceable unit; however, the shelf must be powered down
from the appropriate BIP circuit breakers and the PIM power cables
unplugged before the module can be removed.
PIM faceplate
The side of a power interface module (PIM) where the power cables from the
BIP are connected. The faceplate is designed such that you cannot remove
PIM unless the power cable is removed first. This protects the backplane pins
from arcing if the PIM is pulled with the power left on. The figure Faceplate
of a PIM on a Passport 15000 (page 109) shows the opening for the
connection point.
5.2S2
The table Pin description for the PIM faceplate power connector (page 108)
lists the pin assignments for the PIM faceplate.
Table 13
Pin description for the PIM faceplate power connector
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Pin
Signal
number
Function
Description
L +1
input
battery return feed 1/3
L +2
input
battery return feed 2/4
L -1
input
negative battery feed 1/3
L -2
input
negative battery feed 2/4

Figure 23
Faceplate of a PIM on a Passport 15000
Captive
screw
Opening at the side

for the power cable
PIM handle
PPT 2820 038 AA
5.2S2
Power LED status indicators for PIMs

Each PIM of a Passport 20000 has a LED for the A and B power feeds to the
BIP. See the figure Location of the PIMs, the MAC address, and the alarm/
BITS module in a Passport 20000 (page 111). While a PIM is powered, the
green LED is lit solid. See the table Power LED status indicators for each
PIM (page 110) for an explanation of the LED displays.
Table 14
Power LED status indicators for each PIM
LED color
Mode
Meaning
green
solid
power is on for the slots powered by the PIM
off
power is off because of one or more of the following:

the breaker on the BIM that distributes power to it
is off
the cable from the BIP to the PIM is disconnected
at one or both ends
the power input to the BIP is off or missing for the
indicated A or B feed
the BIM is missing or defective
the LED is burned out
PIM cable assembly

A cable assembly distributes power from the breaker interface modules
(BIMs) in the breaker interface panel (BIP) to the PIMs. The cable assemblies
for the upper and lower Passport 15000 or 20000s are different lengths. The
cable assemblies are installed when a Passport 15000 or 20000 is installed in
a NEBS 2000 frame. The cable assembly of the second Passport 15000 or
20000 is typically installed even if the frame is shipped with only one shelf.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 24
Location of the PIMs, the MAC address, and the alarm/BITS module in a Passport 20000
PIM at 7RU,
A1 and A2
Fabric
Rear frame
upright
PIM at 7RL,
B1 and B2
MAC address
module
PIM at 15RU,
A4 and A5
Alarm/BITS
module
Fabric
PIM status
LEDS
PIM at 15RL,
B4 and B5
PPT 3087 009 AC
5.2S2
Media access control (MAC) address module

The media access control (MAC) address module contains a circuit board
with an 87C51 8-bit microcontroller and a Z-PACK connector used to provide
an interface to the shelf backplane. The module contains the base MAC
address and the range of MAC addresses available for assignment (based on
the base address value). During the Passport 15000 or 20000 software boot
sequence, the active control processor (CP) card takes the range stored in the
MAC address module, divides this value by the number of functional
processor (FP) cards, and distributes to each FP a base value and a range.
The MAC address module is located on the left side of the rear of the shelf
assembly, between the two fabric cards and between the power interface
modules (PIMs) of the upper and lower module cage. The location of the
MAC address module is shown in the figure A shelf assembly of a
Passport 15000 without fabrics, rear view (page 90).
The MAC address module is a field-replaceable unit (FRU) which provides
the shelf with MAC addresses for the CP and FP cards. The module also
communicates the shelf type to the CP cards.
The faceplate is shown in the figure Faceplate of a MAC address module
(page 113) and Location of the PIMs, the MAC address, and the alarm/BITS
module in a Passport 20000 (page 111).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 25
Faceplate of a MAC address module
Captive
screw
DO NOT REMOVE
MAC handles
Seal
PPT 2820 039 AA
5.2S2
Alarm/BITS module
The alarm/BITS module provides the alarm monitoring and the building
integrated timing supply (BITS). There is only one alarm/BITS module per
Passport 15000 or 20000. When it is removed or failed there is no:
BITS timing signal to the control processors (CPs)
reporting of the fabric LED status to the software
reporting of any cooling unit alarms to the control processors (CPs)
reporting of any CP alarms to the breaker interface panel (BIP)
The suspension of timing depends on how the timing was configured in the
software. Since the software detects and reports a missing card, which is
triggered as soon as the cable to a card or module is disconnected, your
replacement activity must be coordinated with the software operator of the
switch to ensure minimum impact on service. Have the software operator
consider putting the CP timing in holdover mode or line timing for the
duration of the replacement.
There are no software or hardware alarms specific to the removal of the alarm/
BITS module itself or leaving its slot empty. Other alarms that may occur as
a result of the removal of the alarm/BITS module are:
7002 0003, if the fabric card component temperature has increased above
the accepted operating temperature
7012 0051, if the cooling unit is not function correctly on a bus-based

shelf or the cooling fan is not functioning correctly or the temperature is
too high on a fabric-based shelf
7017 1000, if the CP is not synchronized to the reference
When the module is replaced, reporting of current alarm status resumes.

Unlike most other hardware parts of the Passport 15000 or 20000, there is no
software command associated with locking, removing, inserting, or
unlocking the alarm/BITS module, however there are commands for locking
the ports on the module.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
The alarm/BITS module passes the signals over the shelf backplane to the
control processor (CP) cards and expansion slots. (The expansion slots are
currently unsupported.)
The alarm/BITS module is a field-replaceable unit (FRU).
This section provides the following information about the alarm/BITS
module:
Types of alarm/BITS modules (page 115)
Alarm/BITS module faceplate (page 116)
Alarm/BITS module cable assemblies (page 122)
Timing cable specifications for the DS1 circuit (page 123)
Timing cable specifications for the E1 balanced circuit (page 123)
Timing cable specifications for the E1 unbalanced circuit (page 124)
Line build out application settings (page 125)
Types of alarm/BITS modules

The types of alarm/BITS module are matched to the CP cards for the type of
interfacing signal as follows.
The types of the alarm/BITS module for a Passport 15000 include
NTHR12, for balanced DS1 twisted pair (matched to the DS1 CP

NTHR06 or NTHW06)
NTHW76, also for the DS1 CP types NTHR06 or NTHW06. This

module is intended for use with the external sync wire-wrap cable
assembly NTHW75. The module and cable assembly are typically
factory-installed. In the case of a retrofit, the parts are also available as
external sync wire wrap hardware kit NTHW74. This alarm/BITS
module is for use in an environment requiring an 8 kHz BITS timing
source signal for customers requiring GR-1244 compliance.
NTHR13, for balanced E1 twisted pair (matched to the E1 CP NTHR35

or NTHW08)
NTHR14, for unbalanced E1 coax (matched to the E1 CP NTHR35)
5.2S2
The types of the alarm/BITS module for a Passport 20000 include
NTPN12, for balanced DS1 twisted pair (matched to the DS1 CP

NTHW06)
NTPN78, also for the DS1 CP type NTHW06. This module is intended
for use with the external sync cable wire-wrap assembly NTHW75. The
module and cable assembly are typically factory-installed, if that is how
the Passport was initially ordered. In the case of a retrofit, the parts are
also available separately. This alarm/BITS module is for use in an
environment requiring an 8 KHz BITS timing source signal for
customers requiring GR-1244 compliance.
NTPN13, for balanced E1 twisted pair (matched to the E1 CP NTHW08,

or matched to the E1 CP NTHR14 when used with the E1 balanced-tounbalanced cable assembly NTHR81)
Alarm/BITS module faceplate

The alarm/BITS module is located at the right side of the rear of the shelf
assembly, between the upper and lower fabric modules (see the figure A shelf
assembly of a Passport 15000 without fabrics, rear view (page 90)).
The alarm/BITS module contains the following connectors:
BITS ports (Sync A-J4 and Sync B-J3) (page 119)
Cooling unit alarm connector (page 119)
BIP alarm connector (page 120)
The alarm/BITS faceplate is shown in the figure Faceplate of an alarm/BITS

module in a Passport 15000 (page 117) and Location of the PIMs, the MAC
address, and the alarm/BITS module in a Passport 20000 (page 111).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 26
Faceplate of an alarm/BITS module in a Passport 15000
J4 for BITS cable

J3 for BITS cable
J2 for alarm cable to cooling unit
J1 for alarm cable to BIP
DO NOT REMOVE
Captive
screw
Seal
Alarm/BITS handles
PPT 2820 040 AA
5.2S2

Figure 27
Faceplate of an alarm/BITS module in a Passport 20000
Fabric
PIM at 7RU,
A1 and A2
Rear frame
upright
PIM at 7RL,
B1 and B2
Alarm/BITS
module
MAC address
module
PIM at 15RU,
A4 and A5
Fabric
PIM status
LEDS
PIM at 15RL,
B4 and B5
J4 for BITS
cable
J3 for
BITS cable
Captive
screw
J2 for alarm
cable to
cooling unit
J1 for alarm
cable to BIP
Handle
PPT 3087 009 AE
241-1501-200 5.2S2
BITS ports (Sync A-J4 and Sync B-J3)

The alarm/BITS module provides two ports for connecting the shelf to a
building integrated timing supply (BITS) interface. The ports are labeled
Sync A-J4 and Sync B-J3. These ports are paired with the control processors
that contain the active BITS circuits. Depending on the variant of the alarm/
BITS module used, these ports support connection to
a DS1 balanced cable (twisted pair D-sub)
a DS1 wire-wrap cable assembly for operation and direct connection of

BITS wires to an externally-mounted terminal block
an E1 balanced cable (twisted pair D-sub)
an E1 unbalanced cable (75-ohm coax D-sub)
The BITS ports are shown in the figure Faceplate of an alarm/BITS module
in a Passport 15000 (page 117).
The pin assignments and the functional specifications for the transmit and
receive circuits for the BITS connectors are listed in 241-1501-240 Passport
15000, 20000 Hardware Installation, Maintenance and Upgrade under the
section for connecting the timing wires.
Cooling unit alarm connector
The cooling unit alarm connector is a 9-pin D connector which receives alarm
signals from the shelfs cooling unit and transmits them to the node backplane
through the alarm/BITS module.
The cooling unit alarm connector is shown in the figure Faceplate of an
alarm/BITS module in a Passport 15000 (page 117).
The pin assignments for the fan alarm connectors are shown in the table Fan
connector pin-out (page 120).
5.2S2

Table 15
Fan connector pin-out
Pin
Signal
no connection
FANTEMP
no connection
GND
no connection
no connection
GND
FANFAIL
no connection
BIP alarm connector

The BIP alarm connector is the bottom connector in the alarm/BITS module.
It performs the following functions:
BIP alarm termination, which provides proper over-voltage protection

for all BIP alarms and provides an interface between the BIP and the CP
and CPX slots through the backplane
shelf ID termination, which provides proper over-voltage protection and

a backplane interface for shelf ID and the BIP signals to the CP and CPX
slots
audio/visual alarm termination, which provides a connection between the

backplane audio/visual alarm signals and the BIP interface to the CP and
CPX slots
The location of the BIP alarm connector is shown in the figure Faceplate of
an alarm/BITS module in a Passport 15000 (page 117).
The pin assignments for the BIP alarm connector are shown in the table BIP
alarm connector pin-out (page 121).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Table 16
BIP alarm connector pin-out
Pin
Signal
MINAUDN
MAJAUDN
CRITAUDN
SHID4
GND
+5BIP
ALMFAILN
no connection
LEDTESTN for Passport 20000, no connection for Passport 15000
10
MINVISN
11
MAJVISN
12
CRITVISN
13
SHID3
14
no connection
15
no connection
16
BKRFAILBN
17
EXTPWRN
18
ACON
19
SHID0
20
SHID1
21
SHID2
22
SHID5
23
BKRTRIPAN
24
BKRFAILAN
(Sheet 1 of 2)
5.2S2

Table 16 (continued)
BIP alarm connector pin-out
Pin
Signal
25
BKRTIPBN
26
no connection
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Alarm/BITS module cable assemblies

The alarm/BITS module connects to four cable assemblies:
two for incoming external timing signals
one for sending cooling unit alarms and receiving LED status changes
one for sending hardware alarms to the BIP and receiving LED status
changes for cards from the CP
The part numbers of the cable assemblies vary according to their length for
reaching the module in an upper or a lower shelf assembly and according to
the type of alarm/BITS module.
The alarm cable assemblies have part numbers NTHR55 for an upper shelf or
NTHR56 for a lower shelf, or NTHR57 for both. The assembly includes the
wires and connectors for connecting to the J1 and J2 outlets on either a
Passport 15000 or 20000.
The prefabricated alarm/BITS timing cables are identified by these PECs:
NTHR75 unbalanced E1 coax for J3 or J4 of the alarm/BITS module

NTHR14
NTHW76 wire-wrap DS1 for J3 or J4 of the alarm/BITS module

NTHW76 for a Passport 15000 or NTPN78 for a Passport 20000
NTPN81 unbalanced E1 for J3 or J4 of the alarm/BITS module NTPN13
The optional balun cable assembly NTPN81 of a Passport 20000 converts the
balanced E1 alarm/BITS module into an unbalanced E1 module.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Using custom or prefabricated timing cable assemblies for the building

integrated timing supply (BITS) is described in 241-1501-240 Passport
15000, 20000 Hardware Installation, Maintenance and Upgrade.
Timing cable specifications for the DS1 circuit

The DS1 BITS interface is a digital clocking (SF (D4) framing is default, ESF
(Fe) is also supported) format interface - no signals or analogue modes. It
must have the following operational characteristics into the alarm/BITS
module.
The BIT rate/accuracy is 1.544 kbits/sec +/- 50 bits/sec (+/- 32 ppm) or

better in self-timed, free-running mode.
The Pulse Amplitude is between 2.4 to 3.6 V peak at the source for a
mark isolated pulse, across a 100 Ohm impedance (cable run is
dependant on line build out).
See the ITU-T G.703 Section 5 for other details with respect to pulse
mask, power levels for all ones, and other considerations.
The functional specifications for the DS1 receive (RX) circuit for a 100-ohm
twisted pair of the A or B timing reference interface are
two 475-ohm resistors for over-voltage protection
two surface-mounted fuses for current protection on the network side
a diode bridge for voltage protection
33-pF capacitors used as a high frequency filter for immunity to noise
two 49.9-ohm resistors for matching impedance
generally, a 1-to-1 step-up transformer is added to interface to the

transceiver
Timing cable specifications for the E1 balanced circuit

The E1 balanced BITS interface is the digital clocking source with the line
format called common channel signalling (CCS)- no signals or analogue
modes. Zero suppression is HDB3, CRC-4 is enabled. It must have the
following operational characteristics into the alarm/BITS module.
The operating frequency is 2,048 kbits/s with a tolerance of +/- 50 ppm

or better.
5.2S2
The Pulse Amplitude for balanced is at 3.0 V with peak mark, a value
of 0 (zero) +/- 0.3 V space into 120 Ohms at the transmitter.
Balanced is 120-Ohm twisted pair cable.
At the receiver end at 1024 kHz, the maximum loss due to cables is 0 to
6 db.
mask, ones ratio, and other considerations.
The functional specifications for the E1 balanced receive (RX) circuit for a
120-ohm twisted pair of the A or B timing reference interface are
two 475-ohm resistors for over-voltage protection on the ZPACK

connector

transceiver
Timing cable specifications for the E1 unbalanced circuit

The E1 unbalanced BITS interface is the digital clocking source with the line
format called common channel signalling (CCS)- no signals or analogue
modes. Zero suppression is HDB3, CRC-4 is enabled. It must have the
following operational characteristics into the alarm/BITS module.
The operating frequency is 2,048 kbits/s with a tolerance of +/- 50 ppm

or better.
The Pulse Amplitude for unbalanced is at 2.37 V with peak mark, a

value of 0 (zero) +/- 0.273 V space into 75 Ohms at the transmitter.
Unbalanced is 75-Ohm coax cable.
At the receiver end at 1024 kHz, the maximum loss due to cables is 0 to
6 db.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
mask, ones ratio, and other considerations.
The functional specifications for the E1 unbalanced coax receive (RX) circuit
for a 75-ohm coax of the A or B timing reference interface are
two 475-ohm resistors for over-voltage protection on the ZPACK

connector

transceiver
Line build out application settings

Cable length depends on the transmitter line build out and the gauge of the
cable. See the table Typical line build out application settings (page 125)
Table 17
Typical line build out application settings
0
0 to 41 m (133 ft)
0 db DSX-1/CSU
41 m (133 ft) to 81 m (266 ft)
DSX-1
81 m (266 ft) to 122 m (399 ft)
DSX-1
122 m (399 ft) to 163 m (533 ft)
DSX-1
163 m (533 ft) to 200 m (655 ft)
DSX-1
-7.5 db CSU
-15 db CSU
5.2S2
Cooling units
Each Passport 15000 or 20000 has a cooling unit to maintain an ambient
temperature inside its shelf assembly. Maintaining the temperature at
optimum levels maintains the operation and performance of the switch
hardware. Keeping the shelf temperature within its normal operating range
will improve the systems service life.
When two Passport 15000 or 20000 switches are mounted into a NEBS 2000
frame, their cooling units are nested against each other. This integration
maximizes the use of hardware real estate. The cooling unit that operates with
the node in the bottom half of a NEBS 2000 frame is the lower cooling unit,
also known as the rear cooling unit because its fans face the rear of the switch
hardware and it is accessed from there. The unit that operates with the node
in the upper half is the upper cooling unit, also known as the front cooling unit
because its fans face the front of the switch hardware (where the processor
cards are) and it is accessed from there.
The versions of the lower cooling unit are NTHR51AA and AB while the
versions of the upper cooling unit are NTHR52AA and AB. Each cooling unit
has a modular design that enables field replacement of the whole unit or any
of its parts.
The physical versions of fans, fan controllers, and temperature sensors are
different depending which version of cooling unit you have. A replacement
part must match the part number that is identified in the tables Cooling unit
parts for the AA versions (page 378) and Cooling unit parts for the AB
versions (page 379).
The different versions of parts provide the same performance except the
shroud of the middle Dyna fan is shaped to reduce the overall noise level of
the lower or upper cooling unit NTHR51AB and NTHR52AB.
For the names and locations of the parts, see these figures:
Parts inside a lower cooling unit NTHR51AA (bottom shown upside

down) (page 127)
Parts inside a lower cooling unit NTHR51AB (bottom shown upside

down) (page 128)
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 28
Parts inside a lower cooling unit NTHR51AA (bottom shown upside down)
Temperature
sensor PCB
Captive screw of controller

(same location in upper and lower units)
Temperature sensor
ESD pad
LED cables
Temperature sensor
Temperature sensor PCB
Temperature
sensor cables
Input power
connections for
all controllers
A controller
ESD jack
Input power
and
alarm cable
A controller
carriage
Finger guard
Power and
alarm connectors
Fan shroud
PPT 2822 013 AF
5.2S2

Figure 29
Parts inside a lower cooling unit NTHR51AB (bottom shown upside down)
Red and green LEDs
LED cable
Fan controller
module
Alarm cable
Temperature
sensor cable
Alarm cable
Temperature
sensor
Power cable
LED cable
Fan power
cable
Power input
connector
Captive mounting screw
PPT 3436 002 AA2
This parts of the upper and lower cooling units are described in these sections:
Environmental control equipment (page 129)
The impact of heat dissipation on rising shelf temperatures (page 131)
Fans (page 133)
Fan controllers (page 133)
Air filters (page 133)
Temperature sensors (page 134)
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Cooling unit LED indications (page 134)
Cooling unit connections (page 135)
Environmental control equipment

The Passport 15000 or 20000 environmental control equipment consists of
two cooling units located in the middle of the frame between the upper and
lower shelf assemblies. The upper cooling unit pushes air from the fan under
the modules in the upper shelf assembly and out through the exhaust plenum
under the BIP. The lower cooling unit pulls air in from the bottom of the
NEBS 2000 frame, over the modules in the lower shelf assembly and out
through the fan assembly. This arrangement in a NEBS 2000 frame is shown
in the figure Upper and lower cooling unit in a frame with air flow direction
(page 130).
When a Passport 15000 or 20000 is in a mounting apparatus other than a
NEBS 2000 frame (is shelf-based), its cooling unit is an upper cooling unit
that is mounted upside down in a lower shelf position and therefore draws the
air into the switch from the front and exhausts it under the BIP.
Each cooling unit consists of three fans and a cooling unit housing located in
a common shelf. Each cooling unit is controlled by temperature sensors
located near where air exits the shelf assembly. Air temperature is measured
as the air exits the shelf enclosure.
Under normal operation and with 3000 Watts dissipated power, the cooling
unit will provide, in the case of air conditioner failure, sufficient air flow (1 to
1.2 m/s) to maintain overall air temperature rise across the shelf of less than
15 degrees Celsius (59 Fahrenheit).
When the exhaust air temperatures rises above 55 degrees Celsius
(131 Fahrenheit), the fans switch to high (full) speed to increase air flow and
cooling of the shelf. The fans return to normal speed when the temperature
falls below 46 degrees Celsius (115 Fahrenheit). Passport nodes should
always be operated with the cooling units on to avoid damage to the CP, FPs,
and fabric cards, even when dusty air filters are removed.
5.2S2

Figure 30
Upper and lower cooling unit in a frame with air flow direction
Air flow out of the

shelf assembly
under the BIP
Air flow into the

upper (front)
cooling unit
Air filter cover
Air flow out

of the lower (rear)
cooling unit
Air flow into the

frame to the
shelf assembly
Air filter cover
PPT 2820 041 AA
241-1501-200 5.2S2
The impact of heat dissipation on rising shelf temperatures

As soon as a cooling unit of an in-service Passport 15000 or 20000 is
unpowered, the air temperature inside the shelf immediately rises and the
temperature sensor readings by the cooling unit are suspended. The fabrics
continue to measure the internal temperature of the shelf. If the rise continues,
one or more FPs can eventually fail. When a fabric reaches 72 degrees Celsius
(161.6 degrees Fahrenheit), it automatically drops all traffic. When both
fabrics reach that temperature, traffic through the Passport stops until the
temperature for one or both drops below the threshold. A built-in hysteresis
prevents the fabrics from continuously toggling on and off at the temperature
threshold.
The air temperature inside the shelf depends on the ambient room
temperature and the heat dissipation of the shelf. As the ambient room
temperature or the heat dissipation increases, the air temperature inside the
shelf increases. The rate of rising temperature depends on the shelf
configuration, that is, the type and number of in-service cards, and the amount
of traffic they are handling.
Since the Passport 15000 or 20000 has a rating of up to 150 watts per card
slot, the air temperature rise within the shelf may be as high as 10 degrees
Celsius (50 degrees Fahrenheit) per card cage with the cooling unit in service.
When the cooling unit is unpowered, the temperature rise will be as high as
40 degrees Celsius (104 degrees Fahrenheit) per card cage. Since normal
operating conditions are below 40 degrees Celsius (104 degrees Fahrenheit),
the elevated temperature will result in service degradation. To determine
whether your shelf configuration will affect service when the cooling unit is
unpowered (for example, for replacing the entire unit), do the following.
Determine whether the total heat dissipation of your shelf configuration will
affect service when removing an entire cooling unit.
1
Calculate the power consumption of the selection of cards on your shelf.

(This may already have been done to determine the size of power cable
to your shelf.)
Calculate the power consumption of each card in the bottom cage and the
one in the cage directly above it.
Compare the power consumptions to the table Maximum shelf heat

dissipation relative to ambient room temperature (page 132).
5.2S2
To calculate the power consumption of the selection of cards on your shelf,

see the section on power distribution and consumption in 241-1501-205
Passport 15000, 20000 Site Requirements and Preparation Guide.
Table 18
Maximum shelf heat dissipation relative to ambient room temperature
Ambient room
temperature
degrees
Total power
dissipation of all
CPs and FPs
Combined power
dissipation of card in bottom
cage and the one above it
25 Celsius
(77 Fahrenheit)
1350 watts
170 watts
30 Celsius
(86 Fahrenheit)
1200 watts
150 watts
35 Celsius
(95 Fahrenheit)
1040 watts
130 watts
40 Celsius
(104 Fahrenheit)
900 watts
110 watts
In general, if the comparison of power consumptions exceeds either the value

of total or combined power dissipation, and the cooling unit is unpowered,
service will be affected as follows.
At 65 degrees Celsius (149 Fahrenheit) inside a fabric, a temperature

alarm occurs. Service is unaffected.
At 72 degrees Celsius (161.6 Fahrenheit) inside a fabric, the fabric is

automatically shut down to protect it. When both fabrics reach the
threshold, the shelf reboots until the temperature sensor inside either
fabric drops below the threshold. A rebooting shelf drops all service.
For more information on the effects of temperature, refer to the environmental

data and power dissipation in 241-1501-205 Passport 15000, 20000 Site
Requirements and Preparation Guide.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Fans
The fans push or pull air across the surfaces of the processor cards and
modules to keep them as cool as ambient room temperature allows. When a
fan is mounted in a lower (rear) cooling unit, it pushes air. When the same fan
is mounted in an upper (front) cooling unit, it pulls air.
Fan controllers
A fan controller controls the power supply to a fan, monitors the operation of
the fan and its speed, and monitors the status of the remote temperature
sensors. In the case of a failure, the controller sends an alarm signal to the
alarm/BITS module and sends a status signal to the other fans, forcing them
to switch to the higher rpm speed.
Air filters
The Passport 15000 or 20000 frame is equipped with air filters to prevent dust
and other airborne contaminants from being drawn into the shelf assemblies
by the cooling units. The filters also assist air flow by acting as air flow
diffusers. The air filter for the lower cooling unit is located at the bottom of
the frame. The air filter for the upper cooling unit is located in the middle of
the frame, between the upper cooling unit and the upper shelf assembly.
The figure Upper and lower cooling unit in a frame with air flow direction
(page 130) shows the location of the air filter. The air filter is the same part
number for all versions of cooling units.
The air filters must be installed in the frame assembly to ensure proper air
flow across the shelf assembly. The Passport 15000 or 20000 should not be
operated without air filters, except briefly during filter replacement. The fans
should remain powered while the filter is being replaced.
The air filters must also be changed periodically so that the accumulation of
dust is prevented from degrading performance or failing plug-in cards, fabric
cards, or modules. For information about the frequency of replacing air filters
and how to replace them, refer to 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000
Hardware Installation, Maintenance and Upgrade in the chapter of safety
considerations and best practices, the section on equipment maintenance.
5.2S2
Temperature sensors
A set of three temperature sensors monitors exhaust air flow from each of the
cooling units, as shown in the figure Upper and lower cooling unit in a frame
with air flow direction (page 130). The sensors for the lower cooling unit are
inside the unit itself, while the sensors for an upper cooling unit are on a
sensor bracket assembly that is mounted in the air flow space above the shelf
assembly. Each temperature sensor is mounted on a PCB. The temperature
sensors are not linked directly to a specific fan and can monitor the air flow
generated by multiple fans simultaneously.
The temperature sensors are linked to a temperature interface block, which
provides bias to the sensors, monitors faults in the sensor circuit, and
processes temperature information. If a temperature greater than 72 degrees
Celsius (162 Fahrenheit) is detected, a HighTemp alarm is sent to the alarm/
BITS module where the alarm is indicated. When a temperature less than
55 degrees Celsius (131 Fahrenheit) is detected, the fans operate at normal
speeds. If a temperature between 55 and 72 degrees Celsius is detected, the
fans switch to high-speed operation.
A built-in hysteresis prevents the fans from continuously toggling slower and
faster at the temperature threshold.
Cooling unit LED indications

Each cooling unit is equipped with LEDs to indicate its status. The table
Cooling unit LED indications (page 134) lists the possible LED displays.
Table 19
Cooling unit LED indications
LED
Description
Green on The unit is on and no fault is detected.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Red on
A fan fault has occurred: missing at least one fan or at least one
temperature sensor has failed. A FANFAIL signal is sent to the
alarm/BITS module, and the remaining fans are switched to the
high speed setting.
None on
The middle circuit breakers (for the cooling units) on both BIMs
are switched off or there is no power to both BIMs for that shelf.
Cooling unit connections

For a description of the cooling unit power connectors, see Function of the
BIP backplane power output connections (page 79).
For the location of the internal connectors, see the figures:
Parts inside a lower cooling unit NTHR51AA (bottom shown upside

down) (page 127)
Parts inside a lower cooling unit NTHR51AB (bottom shown upside

down) (page 128)
For the location of the external connectors, see the figure External cooling
unit cable connections (page 136).
5.2S2

Figure 31
External cooling unit cable connections
Upper (front) cooling unit
LOWER
Power cables to fans

ESD jacks
Status LEDs
Alarm
Power connector B, upper cooling unit

Power connector A, upper cooling unit
Temperature sensor
Status LEDs
UPPER
A
B
Lower (rear) cooling unit

D-sub connector for alarm cable
Power connector B, lower cooling unit
Power connector A, lower cooling unit
PPT 2820 051 AB
241-1501-200 5.2S2
NEBS 2000 frame enclosure

The NEBS 2000 frame can be enclosed in part or completely by a
combination of extended side panels and doors or regular side panels and
frame cover panels. Enclosing the frame controls the accessibility of people
or objects to the equipment inside the frame.
Enclosing the frame with doors and extended side panels

The doors are available in kit NTQS37AA or NTQSAB. The AB version is
the same as AA except that it includes an illuminated brandline cover to
replace the non-illuminated one that is already mounted on the frame.
The extended side panels are available in kit NTPX4050. An extended side
panel can be installed alone or it with a door. Refer to the figure Installed
extended side panels with a door (page 138).
The door or side panel hardware can be added to the frame at any time
provided enough space around the frame is available. For example, a door kit
requires an increase in the size of the frame footprint. The spacial
requirements and considerations for installing a door kit or an extended side
panel kit are in 241-1501-205 Passport 15000, 20000 Site Requirements and
Preparation Guide.
The tasks to install the hardware are in 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000
5.2S2

Figure 32
Installed extended side panels with a door
Extended side panel
Brandline cover
LED for alarm status
Door
Extended
side panel
Kickplate extension
PPT 3458 009 AG3
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Enclosing the frame with regular side panels and frame cover
panels
A regular-sized side panel is also available in kit NTRU0128. This panel will
not work with a door, but it will cover the optional extended cable
management brackets (NTRU0368 or NTRU0369) that can be mounted on a
side of the frame. This panel also coordinates enclosure by the front or rear
frame cover panels from kit NTRU0366. Refer to the figure Installed side
panels with front and rear frame cover panels (page 140).
The frame cover panels are intended to hide the extended cable management
brackets from the front or rear of the frame. These panels can be installed
without the side panels being present, especially if the frame-joining
hardware kit NTRU0370 is used to maximize space usage between adjacent
frames.
The side panel and frame cover panel hardware can be added to the frame at
any time provided enough space around the frame is available. Except for the
thickness of a side panel, the frame footprint is not increased by adding the
hardware. The spacial requirements and considerations for installing a regular
side panel with or without frame cover panels to enclose the optional
extended cable management brackets are in 241-1501-205 Passport 15000,
20000 Site Requirements and Preparation Guide.
The tasks to install the hardware are in 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000
5.2S2

Figure 33
Installed side panels with front and rear frame cover panels
PPT 2821 011 AB
241-1501-200 5.2S2
141
Chapter 4
Control and function processors
This section describes the plug-in processor cards which support network
management, switch management, user services, and network clocking
synchronization.
This section also briefly describes how processor cards support being
upgraded or downgraded.
The location of the control and function processors (CPs and FPs) is shown
in the figure A typical shelf assembly, front view (page 89).
For the list of capabilities of each FP, refer to the FP type in 241-5701-615
Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 FP Configuration Reference.
The sections are
Connecting a Passport to another node (page 142)
Blank processor card (page 146)
Control processors (page 148)
2-port DS3Ch TDM FP (page 160)
4-port DS3Ch FR FP (page 166)
4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with IMA (page 175)
4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES (page 180)
12-port DS3 FP (page 185)
12-port E3 ATM FP (page 195)

5.2S2
142 Chapter 4 Control and function processors
2-port DS3Ch TDM FP (page 160)
32-port E1 TDM FP (page 209)
2-port general processor with disk (page 202)
4-port Gigabit Ethernet FP (page 205)
6-module packet server FP (page 215)
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FPs (page 218)
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP (page 223)
16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP with MT-RJ connectors (page 227)
16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP with LC connectors (page 231)
16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FP (page 238)
1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP (page 250)
4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM FP (page 254)
1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP with APS (page 258)
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP (page 262)
1-port STM-1Ch FP (page 266)
VPN extender card (page 269)
Voice services processor 2 (VSP2) FP (page 273)
Voice services processor 3 (VSP3) FP (page 274)
Voice services processor 3 with optical TDM interface (VSP3-o) FP

(page 283)
SFP optical module (page 288)
Connecting a Passport to another node

To have a Passport 15000 or 20000 switch interwork directly with another
node, a connection must be established between a function processor (FP) on
the Passport and an equivalent processor card on the other node.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Chapter 4 Control and function processors 143
Connecting two Passports

To have a Passport 15000 or 20000 interwork directly with another Passport,
establish the connection between two FPs, one at either end, through a fanout
panel.
If the other Passport is a Passport 7480, the connection is described in
Connecting nodes in a Passport 15000-VSS (page 143).
Cabling an FP, sparing panel, or fanout panel is described in 241-1501-240
A fanout panel must have BNC-to-BNC connectors so that the BNC ends of
the FP cables connect at the fanout panel. For example, you can use the cable
assemblies with PECs NTHR58, NTHR59, or NTHR60. The pinout mapping
of BNC cables to a mini-coax on these cable assemblies are indicated for the
cabling procedures in 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware
After the cable is connected and the FPs have been power tested and loaded
with software, have the software operator configure the port or ports at each
FP to be the same type of ATM trunk or ATM bearer services trunk. Choose
the type of trunk that provides appropriate interworking capabilities. To
configure trunks for inter-nodal communication, refer to 241-5701-420
Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Trunking Guide.
Connecting nodes in a Passport 15000-VSS

The fiber link between the Passport 15000 and the Passport 7480 in a
Passport 15000-Variable Speed Switch (VSS) can be made using an external
OC-3 connection between OC-3 single-mode or multi-mode function
processors (FPs). The fiber cable requires SC connectors at each end. You
must provide the customized fiber cable and connectors.
When the OC-3 card pair has different reaches (SR, IR, or LR), the
and Upgrade indicates how to determine when to use inline attenuators. You
must provide your own attenuators.
5.2S2
The routing of the fiber link cable should go through or beside the fan cover
grill. This route is preferred because it isolates the fiber link froth the other
fiber cables. There is no problem with running the fiber link behind the
Passport 7480 if another route must be used.
The software configuring of the Passport 7400 and the Passport 15000 is
different. Any tools you use to configure the network must be able to adapt
both sets of configuration commands.
Connecting a Passport 15000 or 20000 to a Shasta 5000

The fiber link between a Passport 15000 or 20000 and a Shasta 5000 can be
made using an external OC-3 connection between a Passport 15000 OC-3
function processor (FP) and a Shasta 5000 OC-3 line card. The fiber cable
requires SC connectors at each end. You must provide the customized fiber
cable and connectors.
Connecting a Passport 15000 or 20000 to an EdgeLink 100

Before installing the interface cables and connecting them, the EdgeLink 100
multiplexor must be mounted and the DS3 function processor (FP) with BNC
connectors of the Passport 15000 or 20000 must already be installed. The part
number of the mux is NTPV02. For the installation of an EdgeLink 100, refer
to Telco Systems documentation, starting with the document EdgeLink 100
Digital Multiplexer General Description, section 825-102-001.
The EdgeLink interfaces to a DS3 function processor (FP) with BNC
connectors in the Passport 15000 or 20000 and to an RJ48 termination
through an access panel. The RJ48 connections are either:
64-pin Cinch or wirewrap to an RJ48 T1 access panel with monitor jacks

(part number A0718812)
64-pin Cinch or wirewrap to an RJ48 T1 access panel (part number

A0718813)
The interface cables that connect an EdgeLink 100 to the Passport or the
Ethernet hub of a Preside Multiservice Data Manager are listed in the table
Interface cables between a Passport 15000 or 20000 and an EdgeLink 100
(page 145). Two cables are required, one for transmitting and one for
receiving.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Table 20
Interface cables between a Passport 15000 or 20000 and an EdgeLink 100
Type and Part number
quantity
Length
Type of connector at
EdgeLink
other end
DS1,
two
A0718801, Telco
Systems AWX432G5
1.5 m
(5 ft)
90-degree male 64-pin to

64-pin Amphenol/Cinch
RJ48 termination
or wirewrap
DS1,
two
A0718802, Telco
4.6 m
Systems AWX432G15 (15 ft)

RJ48 termination
or wirewrap
DS1,
two
A0718803, Telco
9.1 m
Systems AWX432G30 (30 ft)

RJ48 termination
or wirewrap
1.5 m
(5 ft)
90-degree male 64-pin

Amphenol/Cinch to
wirewrap
wirewrap at RJ48
termination
DS1,
A0718780, Telco
7.6 m
set of two Systems AXX432G25 (25 ft)

Amphenol/Cinch to
wirewrap
wirewrap at RJ48
termination
DS1,
A0718781, Telco
15.2 m
set of two Systems AXX432G50 (50 ft)

Amphenol/Cinch to
wirewrap
wirewrap at RJ48
termination
DS3,
two
rated as 728A RG-6U

or equivalent
custom
90-degree male-to-female male BNC on a DS3

BNC adapter for standard FP
BNC male connector
DS3,
two
NTFP19AC
1m
(3.2 ft)
male BNC
male BNC on a DS3

FP
DS3,
two
NTFP19AA
3m
(9.8 ft)
male BNC
male BNC on a DS3

FP
DS3,
two
NTFP19AB
15 m
male BNC
(48.2 ft)
male BNC on a DS3

FP
Ethernet
Telco Systems
AWX454G10 for
standard LAN trunk
cable IEEE 802.3
3m
(10 ft)
DS1,
A0718779, Telco
set of two Systems AXX432G5
male RJ-45, eight-position a male RJ45 connector

modular
for a female connector
on the hub that is
linked to Preside
Multiservice Data
Manager
5.2S2
Blank processor card

A blank processor card is an empty card used to fill an empty processor slot
in the shelf assembly. A blank card protects the circuitry within the card cage
and ensures proper air flow through the shelf assembly. If a card slot does not
have a function processor (FP) or a control processor (CP) in it for longer than
a few minutes, a blank must be used for the interim.
Having an empty slot while the switch is powered up, especially if it operating
at full service, reduces the air flow through both cages of the shelf assembly
and reduces the containment of EMI. Reducing the airflow means the ambient
temperature inside the shelf rises towards the temperature shut-down
thresholds of the fabrics.
A shelf assembly is typically shipped with blanks for empty slots. With a
Passport 15000 or a shelf-based Passport 20000, blanks are shipped in a
container. With a Passport 20000 in a NEBS 2000 frame, the blanks are
shipped in the slots in the transportation position in the same way as other
processor cards. Blanks have PEC NTHR64.
Note: A blank card can be used in a CP slot, but it is not recommended
to run your Passport without the second (backup) CP.
Blank processor cards were formerly referred to as filler cards, but the
faceplate has always been labeled with BLANK. See the figure Faceplate of
a blank processor card with PEC NTHR64 (page 147).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 34
Faceplate of a blank processor card with PEC NTHR64
Dummy status LEDs
Blank face
Card latches
PPT 2822 012 AB2
5.2S2
Control processors
A CP
is either a CP2 or a more powerful CP3 which includes a Power PC

processor, PQC ASICs for datapath frame forwarding, and larger disk
storage. Both CPs perform the same functions, while a CP3 offers
increased processing power and connection space.
sequences FP startup
downloads new software onto FPs
performs memory-intensive tasks for services delivered by FPs
manages and monitors the status of the FPs, the fabric cards, and other
Passport 15000 or 20000 hardware
provides system timing for all other processor cards connected to the
backplane
monitors and processes alarms and the performance of real-time clocking

to support building integrated timing supply (BITS) through
an E1 BITS CP2 (NTHR35) or CP3 (NTHW08)
a DS1 BITS CP2 (NTHR06) or CP3 (NTHW06)
interfaces with Preside Multiservice Data Manager (MDM) or a text

interface device, which is used for network operator access, network
monitoring, provisioning, and maintenance
Text interface devices connect directly to a port on the faceplate of a CP.
These devices are not connected during normal operation, and are only
used for installation and debugging purposes.
connects to Preside MDM through a 10Base-T Ethernet port for CP2 or

a 100Base-T port for CP3
is half of a redundant pair in a Passport 15000 or 20000 such that failure

of the active CP causes the standby CP to take over
For CP2 connectors, see Faceplate of a CP2 with PEC NTHR06 or

NTHR35 (page 150).
241-1501-200 5.2S2
For CP3 connectors, see the figure Faceplate of a CP3 with PEC NTHW06
or NTHW08 (page 151).
Note: Earlier versions of the NTHW06 and NTHW08 CP3 cards include
the unused P4 port connector. In later versions, this feature has been
removed.
For the description of the LEDs on the faceplate, see Status LEDs of a CP
(page 357).
5.2S2

Figure 35
Faceplate of a CP2 with PEC NTHR06 or NTHR35
Upper card
latch
Status LEDs
V.24 DCE
operator port P1
V.24 DCE 9-pin

D-sub connector
Power status LEDs

Tx
Pin Numbering
Scheme
Link
Cal
Rx
Ethernet port P0
Lower card
latch
Keyed RJ45 connector

(rotated view)
PPT 2822 007 AB3
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 36
Faceplate of a CP3 with PEC NTHW06 or NTHW08
Upper card latch

9
Status LEDs
V.24 DCE
operator port P3
V.24 DCE 9-pin

D-sub connector
P2 (not used)
Pin Numbering
Scheme
P1 (not used)
Ethernet 10BaseT
or 100BaseT
P0
Lower card latch
Keyed RJ45 connector

(rotated view)
PPT 3473 001 AA
Information about CPs is divided into these sections:
CP hardware (page 152)
5.2S2
CP software requirements (page 152)
CP cables (page 153)
Ethernet CP pinout and signal names (page 158)
V.24 CP pinout and signal names (page 158)
CP line rate (page 159)
CP compliance with standards (page 159)
CP hardware
The CP consists of a motherboard, a memory daughter card, and a power
supply daughter card, with a hard disk mounted on the motherboard.
The CP connects to the shelf backplane, providing an interface to both fabric
cards. It performs activities associated with the fabric cards and routing data
through the switch.
The CP interface supports these functions
disk interface
stratum clock
real-time clock (for example, for the time-of-day clock)
shelf alarm circuitry
external interfaces, including a V.24 DCE port for Preside MDM

connectivity, a 10Base-T Ethernet port for OAM of CP2, and 100Base-T
Ethernet for OAM of CP3
building integrated timing supply (BITS) from the alarm/BITS module

(if connected to the site source)
The CP hard disk drive stores the Passport software, configuration data, and
spooled information.
CP software requirements
See the following tables for minimum software requirements of
Passport 15000 and 20000 CPs:
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Table 21
CP minimum software requirements for a Passport 15000
Order code
CP part description and software version
NTHR06CA, CP2s are supported with PCR1.1 and later releases.

NTHR35CA
NTHW06AA, CP3s are supported with PCR1.3 and later releases.
NTHW08AA
Table 22
CP minimum software requirements for a Passport 20000
Order code
CP part description and software version
NTHW06AA, CP3s are supported with PCR 3.1 and later releases provided
NTHW08AA each is migrated to the current PCR of the switch
CP cables
CPs of a Passport 15000 or 20000 are installed in slots 0 and 1. (Slots 0E and
1E are reserved for later development and must contain blank processor cards
in the meantime.) Each control processor card has CP marked on its faceplate.
(A CP2 indicates CP2 while a CP3 indicates CP.)
The types of CP cables and their connectors depend on the kinds of
terminations on the faceplate of the CP2 or CP3, and on the equipment at the
other end. You must provide the cables and connectors that link a CP to Nortel
Networks equipment such as a local user interface terminal or a Preside
MDM workstation communicating through a router or hub of a local area
network (LAN), or to any other CPE termination.
Prefabricated cables are available for any CP. Each CP3 is shipped with its
own two cables. CP2 cables are available in optional kit NT0479, which
includes cable assemblies NT0460 and NT0477 as shown in the figures CP2
Ethernet cable NT0460 (page 156) and CP2 Ethernet crossover cable
NT0477 with RJ-45 connectors and ferrite bead (page 157). On a CP3, ports
5.2S2
P1, P2, and P4 are not supported for use. The available cables for all other
ports are described in the table Prefabricated CP cable assemblies
(page 154).
Table 23
Prefabricated CP cable assemblies
Part
number
Description
A0821568 Ethernet 100Base-T

straight-through CAT 5
strand STP cable with
RJ-45 connectors
Port number on
type of CP
Examples of the far-end

connection
Cable
length
P0 on CP3
the hub port that

communicates with a
Preside MDM
10 m
(32.8 ft)
an operator workstation
10 m
(32.8 ft)
The above-mentioned
cable assembly ships
with the FP although the
minimum shielding
requirement is for a UTP
cable.
A0822236 null modem (Ethernet
P0 on CP3
crossover) CAT 5 strand
STP cable with RJ-45
connectors
The above-mentioned
cable assembly ships
with the FP although the
minimum shielding
requirement is for a UTP
cable.
NT0460
Ethernet cable
P1 on CP2 or CP2E
with an RS232 serial port
1.2 m
(4.0 ft)
928A
inline transceiver
with a CP2 Ethernet

connection
(as required)
___________________
na
(Sheet 1 of 2)
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Prefabricated CP cable assemblies
Part
number
Description
Port number on
type of CP
Examples of the far-end

connection
Cable
length
NT0477
Ethernet crossover
cable with RJ-45
connectors
P1 on CP2 or CP2E
the hub or router port that

communicates with a
Preside MDM
3m
(9.8 ft)
NTBP25
V.24 DEC operator port

cable with 9-pin D-sub
connectors, described
in Specifications for a
custom-made CP cable
NTBP25 (page 157)
P1 on CP2,
P3 on CP3, and/or
the 9-pin DCE port on
either CP of the
Passport 7400 in a
Passport 15000-VSS
with a 9-pin D-sub
connector for an RS232
serial port
4.5 m
(15.0 ft)
(Sheet 2 of 2)
The maximum length of 100Base-T Ethernet cable between a CP and the hub
or router of a Preside MDM workstation, or directly to the workstation is
100 m (328 ft). Any equipment connected to the P0 Ethernet port must have
a grounded RJ-45 connection so that both ends of the cable contact the
grounding. The cable is already grounded at the CP3 end.
5.2S2

Figure 37
CP2 Ethernet cable NT0460
1.23 m (4 ft)
Sliding
latch
Pin 1
P1
Pin 9
P2
Pin 9
Pin 1
Label of
part number
Pin 15
Pin 8
To FP ethernet
connector
Pin 15
Pin 8
PPT 3419 002 AA
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 38
CP2 Ethernet crossover cable NT0477 with RJ-45 connectors and ferrite bead
3 m (9.8 ft)
Pin 1
P1
P2
Pin 8
Pin 8
Pin 1
Label of
part number
At DCE
or DTE
To FP
connector
Wire wrapped
around ferrite
(cover removed)
PPT 3419 001 AA
Specifications for a custom-made CP cable NTBP25

You can make your own custom-length version of the NTBP25 cable
assembly. You must consider the following requirements:
RS232 4-pair CAT5 shielded operator cable
V.24 DCE 9-pin D-sub pinout on both ends as indicated in the table V.24
connector pinouts (page 158)
0.205 mm2 (24 AWG) thickness
FT4 fire rating
30-m (50-ft) length
5.2S2
Ethernet CP pinout and signal names

The table Ethernet connector pinouts (page 158) lists the connector pinouts
for the CP2 10BaseT Ethernet and the CP3 100BaseT Ethernet ports.
Table 24
Ethernet connector pinouts
Pin numbers Signal name
1
Tx +
Tx -
Rx +
not used
not used
Rx -
not used
not used
V.24 CP pinout and signal names

This table V.24 connector pinouts (page 158) lists the pinouts for the local
operator port connector.
Table 25
V.24 connector pinouts
Pin
numbers
RS232-C
pin
numbers
V.24 signal
ITU-T signal
number
Direction on
DCE port
15
TSET
114
output
TXD
103
input
RXD
104
output
20
DTR
108
input
GND
102
not applicable
(Sheet 1 of 2)
241-1501-200 5.2S2

V.24 connector pinouts
Pin
numbers
RS232-C
pin
numbers
V.24 signal
ITU-T signal
number
Direction on
DCE port
DCD (RSLD) 109
output
RTS
105
input
CTS (RFS)
106
output
17
RSET
115
output
(Sheet 2 of 2)
CP line rate
The CPs line rate supports asynchronous data transfer at 9.6 kbit/s.
CP compliance with standards

The V.24 port supports a subset of CCITT V.24 standards and can
accommodate most interface devices.
Ethernet compliance with standards

The Ethernet FP complies with these standards and conventions:
IEEE 802.3
Digital/Intel/Xerox (DIX)
5.2S2
2-port DS3Ch TDM FP

For the interface information about the 2-port DS3 channelized time division
multiplexing (TDM) FP, see:
Faceplate of a 2-port DS3Ch TDM FP with PEC NTHW91 (page 161)
2-port DS3Ch TDM line connections (page 162)
2-port DS3Ch TDM cable assemblies (page 162)

(page 164)
The software name (card type) of the NTHW91 is 2pDS3cAal.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 39
Faceplate of a 2-port DS3Ch TDM FP with PEC NTHW91
Status LEDs
Sparing connector
P6
Transmit (Tx)
Port 0
Receive (Rx)
Card latches
Transmit (Tx)
Port 1
Receive (Rx)
Tx Monitor 0
Tx Monitor 1
Coax connector
PPT 2973 001 AA
5.2S2
2-port DS3Ch TDM line connections

You can connect the lines (ports) of this DS3 FP directly to the far end
network equipment or another DS3 FP, or indirectly through the 3-port DS3,
E3, or E1 one-for-one sparing panel identified by PEC NTFP99AA or the
12-port DS3 fanout panel NTHW52. Refer to Termination panels for FPs
(page 291) for the description, function, and capabilities of the panel.
The connections can be made to equivalent non-Nortel Networks equipment
provided the cabling criteria are met.
2-port DS3Ch TDM cable assemblies

The maximum cable length for DS3Ch lines to customer equipment is 137 m
(450 ft). The distance between the FP and the sparing panel is part of the total
length.
The table Cable assemblies for a DS3Ch TDM FP (page 162) lists the
available prefabricated cables. The cable assemblies with standard male BNC
connectors at both ends can be connected to either another FP, the
NTFP99AA sparing panel, the NTHW52 fanout panel, or other compatible
equipment.
Table 26
Cable assemblies for a DS3Ch TDM FP
PEC
Description
Length
NTFP19AD
male straight BNC to male straight BNC
3.0 m (9.8 ft)
NTFP19AE
15 m (49 ft)
NTHR69
DB9 sparing control port
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR70
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR71
15 m (49 ft)
You can custom make your own traffic port cables to connect the FP to the
other end connections by using the specifications in the table Cable
assembly parts for a 2-port DS3Ch TDM FP (page 163). The port
connections are identified in the figure Faceplate of a 2-port DS3Ch TDM
FP with PEC NTHW91 (page 161). Information about assigning port
241-1501-200 5.2S2
connections is described in the processor card cabling chapter of

and Upgrade.
Table 27
Cable assembly parts for a 2-port DS3Ch TDM FP
Item
Description
at the FP faceplate, male coax connector
75-ohm straight or right-angle

crimp-on male BNC plug
(connector)
cable NT-734 or comparable cable such as 75-ohm coaxial cable with

RG-59/U
double shielded construction
at the sparing panel faceplate, a male
connector 28P387-1 (straight) or 28P388 crimp-on male BNC plug
(right-angle) made by Specialty Connector (connector)
Company, or a comparable one
You can custom make your own control port cable using the following
specifications:
tin-plated copper cable with 5 conductors at 7 strands of 32 AWG

(0.0320 mm2) wire for each conductor, with an aluminum polyester
shield, covered by poly vinyl chloride insulation (for example, Beldon
Wire and Cable part number 9535)
a resultant cable size of 24 AWG (0.205 mm2)
a 45-degree downwards offset female DB9 connector with standard

slotted fastening screws for the FP faceplate; see the orientation of the
sparing D-sub connector in the figure Faceplate of a 2-port DS3Ch
TDM FP with PEC NTHW91 (page 161) to determine the orientation
of the downwards offset relative to the shape of the D
a straight male DB9 connector with standard slotted fastening screws for
the sparing panel faceplate
5.2S2
Refer to the inset of the control port in the figure Faceplate of a 2-port
DS3Ch TDM FP with PEC NTHW91 (page 161). The PS is the power
supply. Both ends of the cable have the same pinout, and the control port
pinout is the same for all DS3 and E3 cards.
For more information, see Cables and cable management (page 315).
Assigning sparing panel connections for 2-port DS3C TDM

FPs
The figure Cable connections between 2-port DS3C TDM FPs and a 3-port
sparing panel NTFP99 (page 165) shows the connection endpoints between
the spared FPs and their sparing panel. It also identifies the endpoints at the
sparing panel from the far-end or next-hop CPE.
A sparing panel has a transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) pair for each port. When
cabling Passport FPs and sparing panels, do Tx-to-Tx and Rx-to-Rx for all
equipment from the FP up to the far-end termination of the FP connection.
The sparing panel NTFP99 can also be deployed as a one-for-one fanout
panel (or patch panel) provided the connections are to the Main Tx and Rx
ports.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 40
Cable connections between 2-port DS3C TDM FPs and a 3-port sparing panel NTFP99
P1 TX
P1 RX
P0 TX
P0 RX
Monitor P2
P1 TX
LINE
P1 RX
LINE
P0 TX
LINE
P0 RX
LINE
Monitor P1
P1 TX
P1 RX
P0 TX
P0 RX
Monitor P0
To next equipment
towards or at the
far end
PPT 2175 001 AC2
5.2S2
4-port DS3Ch FR FP
For the interface information about the 4-port DS3Ch FR FP, see:
4-port DS3Ch FR identifiers (page 166)
Faceplate of a 4-port DS3Ch FR FP with PEC NTHW88 or NTHW89

(page 167)
4-port DS3 FR FP line connections (page 167)
4-port DS3 FR FP cable assemblies (page 168)
Assigning sparing panel connections for 4-port DS3 FPs (page 171)
Table 28
4-port DS3Ch FR identifiers
FP name
PQC6v2 (also
PQC12
known as PQC2)
4-port DS3 channelized NTHR88
NTHR89
Software name
(card type)
4pDS3Ch
When a specific PEC is not mentioned, assume the text applies to both PQC
versions of the card.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 41
Faceplate of a 4-port DS3Ch FR FP with PEC NTHW88 or NTHW89
Status LEDs
DB9 interface connector
to sparing panel
5 ground
4 PS status
3 PS load
6 ground
Upper latch
for seating
Captive fastening screw

Pin A8
4-port DS3
8W8 D-sub connector
To termination panel
or far-end connection
Pin A1
Lower latch
for seating
Rx3
Tx3
Rx2
Tx2
Rx1
Tx1
Rx0
Tx0
Ports 0 to 3
PPT 2906 002 AB3
4-port DS3 FR FP line connections

You can connect the NTHR88 or NTHR89 directly to the far-end network
equipment or another DS3 FP, or indirectly through a termination panel.
Termination panels include the 12-port fanout panel NTHW52 or the
one-for-six 12-port sparing panel NTQS31. Refer to the Termination panels
for FPs (page 291) for the description, function, and capabilities of the
panels.
The connections can also be made to equivalent non-Nortel Networks
equipment provided the cabling criteria are met.
5.2S2
4-port DS3 FR FP cable assemblies

The maximum cable distance for DS3 lines to customer premises equipment
(CPE) is 137 m (450 ft). The distance between the FP and the termination
panel is part of the total length.
The table Cable assemblies for a 4-port DS3 FR FP (page 168) lists the
available prefabricated cables.
Table 29
Cable assemblies for a 4-port DS3 FR FP
PEC
Description
Length
NTHR58
DS3 male 8W8 mini-coax to male BNC
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR59
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR60
15 m (49 ft)
NTHR72
DS3 male 8W8-to-8W8 male mini-coax
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR73
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR74
15 m (49 ft)
NTHR69
DS3 DB9 sparing control port
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR70
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR71
15 m (49 ft)
specifications:

241-1501-200 5.2S2

sparing D-sub connector in the figure Faceplate of a 4-port DS3Ch FR
FP with PEC NTHW88 or NTHW89 (page 167) to determine the
orientation of the downwards offset relative to the shape of the D
DS3Ch FR FP with PEC NTHW88 or NTHW89 (page 167). The PS is the
power supply. Both ends of the cable have the same pinout, and the control
port pinout is the same for all DS3 and E3 cards.
The pinout of the traffic ports is shown in the figures Faceplate of a 4-port
DS3Ch FR FP with PEC NTHW88 or NTHW89 (page 167) and Labels of
mini-coax and BNC cable connections on a 4-port NTHR58 cable assembly
(page 170), and in the table Mapping an 8W8 and BNC cable to a
termination panel from a DS3Ch FR FP (page 171). Information about
assigning port connections is described in the processor card cabling chapter
of 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Installation,
5.2S2

Figure 42
Labels of mini-coax and BNC cable connections on a 4-port NTHR58 cable assembly
BNC 8
RX4
To P0, P1, or P2
To P0, P1, or P2
Heat
Heat
shrink
shrink
BNC 7
TX4
BNC 6
RX3
Tie-wrap
Tie-wrap
NTHR58xx
NTHR58
label
label
Pin A8
Pin A8
Orientation
Orientation
space
space
Pin A1
Pin A1
Mini-coax
Mini-coax
cable
cluster
cable cluster
BNC 5
TX3
BNC 4
RX2
BNC 3
TX2
BNC 2
RX1
BNC 1
TX1
Cable
Cable
label
label
Heat
Heat
shrink
shrink
PPT 2950 001 AA
PPT 2950 001 AA2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Table 30
Mapping an 8W8 and BNC cable to a termination panel from a DS3Ch FR FP
Port on
8W8 pin
faceplate function
8W8 pin
number
BNC label
provided
Suggested BNC connection label at the

sparing or fanout panel
P0
Rx 4
A8
RX4
<node_id>/<fp_slot_no>/P0/Rx4
Tx 4
A7
TX4
<node_id>/<fp_slot_no>/P0/Tx4
Rx 3
A6
RX3
Tx 3
A5
TX3
Rx 2
A4
RX2
Tx 2
A3
TX2
Rx 1
A2
RX1
Tx 1
A1
TX1
Assigning sparing panel connections for 4-port DS3 FPs

The figure 8W8-to-BNC cable connections between two 4-port DS3s and
sparing panel NTHR79 (page 172) shows the connection endpoints between
the spared FPs and identifies the endpoints at the sparing panel from the
far-end or next-hop CPE, such as an EdgeLink 100.
5.2S2

Figure 43
8W8-to-BNC cable connections between two 4-port DS3s and sparing panel NTHR79
Spare FP
DB9 interface
connector to
sparing panel
5 ground
4 PS status
3 PS load
6 ground
RX4
TX4
RX3
TX3
RX2
TX2
TX1
RX1
Main FP
P3 TX
P3 RX
P2 TX
P2 RX
P1 TX
P1 RX
P0 TX
P0 RX
P3 TX
LINE
P3 RX
LINE
P2 TX
LINE
P2 RX
LINE
P1 TX
LINE
P1 RX
LINE
P0 TX
LINE
P0 RX
LINE
P3 TX P3 RX P2 TX P2 RX
P1 TX
P1 RX
P0 TX
P0 RX
TX2
RX2
TX1
TX4
RX4
TX3
RX3
To next-hop
equipment
RX1
PPT 3208 001 AA4
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Up to six 4-port DS3 FPs can be spared by a seventh DS3 in a one-for-n

configuration using the 12-port DS3 sparing panel NTQS31. Any of the DS3
FPs that support one-for-n sparing can be connected to the NTQS31. The
following cabling criteria must be met.
Each cable assembly must have an 8W8 connector at the sparing panel
end. The prefabricated cable assemblies that can be used with the DS3
FPs are identified in each FP description in this chapter.
All FPs must be in the same shelf, that is, share the same CPs.
All FPs must connect to the same 8W8 port number on the sparing panel,
for example, the figure 8W8-to-BNC cable connections between two
4-port DS3s and sparing panel NTHR79 (page 172) shows all
connections on port zero (P0).
If less than six DS3s are spared, the cabling on the sparing panel must be
sequential from top to bottom on the sparing panel, then left to right
without skipping a port connection.
The sequence of FPs in a shelf do not necessarily have to be cabled in the

same sequence to the sparing panel. For example, the figure
8W8-to-BNC cable connections between two 4-port DS3s and sparing
panel NTHR79 (page 172) shows that the first FP is connected to the
third sparing panel port number and the third FP is connected to the first
sparing panel port number. It is logical to connect cables in sequence
from their position in the shelf and in sequence on the sparing panel so
that software configurations are easier to assign and identify.
The software configuration (provisioning) of the one-for-n sparing must

identify the correct slot and port numbers of each card relative to the
sparing panel. No sparing panel port number can be skipped in favor of
a subsequent connection.
The figure 8W8-to-BNC cable connections between two 4-port DS3s and
sparing panel NTHR79 (page 172) is an example of connections. The
control port cable connections are omitted to clearly indicate the traffic port
connections.
5.2S2

Figure 44
Cable connections between seven 4-port DS3s each with 8W8s and sparing panel NTQS31
4-port DS3 Main FPs
P0
P1
P2
Control ports
P0
P1
spare
P2
FP1 FP2 FP3 FP4 FP5 FP6 FP
P0
P1
P2
P0
P1
P2
P0
P1
P2
P0
P1
P2
P0
P1
P2
4-port DS3
Spare FP
PPT 2819 017 AD
241-1501-200 5.2S2
4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with IMA

For the interface information about the 4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with IMA,
see:
Faceplate of a 4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with PEC NTHR31 (page 175)
4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with IMA line connections (page 176)
4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with IMA cable assemblies (page 176)
The software name (card type) of the NTHR31 is 4pDS3ChAtm.

Figure 45
Faceplate of a 4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with PEC NTHR31
Status LEDs
to sparing panel
5 ground
4 PS status
3 PS load
6 ground
Upper latch
for seating

Pin A8
4-port DS3
8W8 D-sub connector
Pin A1
Lower latch
for seating
Rx3
Tx3
Rx2
Tx2
Rx1
Tx1
Rx0
Tx0
Ports 0 to 3
PPT 2906 002 AB3
5.2S2
4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with IMA line connections

network equipment or another DS3 FP, or indirectly through a termination
panel. Termination panels include the 12-port fanout panel NTHW52, the
one-for-six 12-port sparing panel NTQS31, or the one-for-one 4-port sparing
panel NTHR79. Refer to Termination panels for FPs (page 291) for the
description, function, and capabilities of the panels.
4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with IMA cable assemblies

The table Cable assemblies for a 4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with IMA
(page 176) lists the available prefabricated cables.
Table 31
Cable assemblies for a 4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with IMA
241-1501-200 5.2S2
PEC
Description
Length
NTHR58
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR59
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR60
15 m (49 ft)
NTHR72
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR73
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR74
15 m (49 ft)
NTHR69
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR70
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR71
15 m (49 ft)
specifications:


sparing D-sub connector in the figure Faceplate of a 4-port DS3Ch ATM
FP with PEC NTHR31 (page 175) to determine the orientation of the
downwards offset relative to the shape of the D
DS3Ch ATM FP with PEC NTHR31 (page 175). The PS is the power
supply. Both ends of the cable have the same pinout, and the control port
pinout is the same for all DS3 and E3 cards.
DS3Ch ATM FP with PEC NTHR31 (page 175) and Labels of mini-coax
and BNC cable connections on a 4-port NTHR58 cable assembly
termination panel from a DS3Ch ATM FP (page 179). Information about
5.2S2

Figure 46
BNC 8
RX4
To P0, P1, or P2
To P0, P1, or P2
Heat
Heat
shrink
shrink
BNC 7
TX4
BNC 6
RX3
Tie-wrap
Tie-wrap
NTHR58xx
NTHR58
label
label
Pin A8
Pin A8
Orientation
Orientation
space
space
Pin A1
Pin A1
Mini-coax
Mini-coax
cable
cluster
cable cluster
BNC 5
TX3
BNC 4
RX2
BNC 3
TX2
BNC 2
RX1
BNC 1
TX1
Cable
Cable
label
label
Heat
Heat
shrink
shrink
PPT 2950 001 AA
PPT 2950 001 AA2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Table 32
Mapping an 8W8 and BNC cable to a termination panel from a DS3Ch ATM FP
Port on
8W8 pin
faceplate function
8W8 pin
number
BNC label
provided

P0
Rx 4
A8
RX4
Tx 4
A7
TX4
Rx 3
A6
RX3
Tx 3
A5
TX3
Rx 2
A4
RX2
Tx 2
A3
TX2
Rx 1
A2
RX1
Tx 1
A1
TX1
5.2S2
4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES

For the interface information about the 4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES,
see:
Faceplate of a 4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES with PEC NTHR91

(page 180)
4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES line connections (page 181)
4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES cable assemblies (page 181)
The software name (card type) of the NTHR91 is 4pDS3ChAal1.

Figure 47
Faceplate of a 4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES with PEC NTHR91
Status LEDs
to sparing panel
5 ground
4 PS status
3 PS load
6 ground
Upper latch
for seating

Pin A8
4-port DS3
8W8 D-sub connector
Pin A1
Lower latch
for seating
Rx3
Tx3
Rx2
Tx2
Rx1
Tx1
Rx0
Tx0
Ports 0 to 3
PPT 2906 002 AB3
241-1501-200 5.2S2
4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES line connections

network equipment or another DS3 FP, or indirectly through a termination
panel. Termination panels include the 12-port fanout panel NTHW52, the
one-for-six 12-port sparing panel NTQS31, or the one-for-one 4-port sparing
panel NTHR79. Refer to Termination panels for FPs (page 291) for the
description, function, and capabilities of the panels.
4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES cable assemblies

The table Cable assemblies for a 4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES
(page 181) lists the available prefabricated cables.
Table 33
Cable assemblies for a 4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES
PEC
Description
Length
NTHR58
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR59
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR60
15 m (49 ft)
NTHR72
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR73
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR74
15 m (49 ft)
NTHR69
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR70
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR71
15 m (49 ft)
5.2S2
specifications:


sparing D-sub connector in the figure Faceplate of a 4-port DS3Ch FP
with AAL1 CES with PEC NTHR91 (page 180) to determine the
orientation of the downwards offset relative to the shape of the D
DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES with PEC NTHR91 (page 180). The PS is the
power supply. Both ends of the cable have the same pinout, and the control
port pinout is the same for all DS3 and E3 cards.
DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES with PEC NTHR91 (page 180) and Labels of
mini-coax and BNC cable connections on a 4-port NTHR58 cable assembly
termination panel from a DS3Ch FP (page 184). Information about
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 48
RX4
To P0, P1, or P2
TX4
RX3
Heat
shrink
Tie-wrap
TX3
RX2
NTHR58
label
Mini-coax
cable cluster
TX2
RX1
Pin A8
Orientation
space
Pin A1
TX1
Cable
label
Heat
shrink
PPT 2950 001 AA2
5.2S2
Table 34
Mapping an 8W8 and BNC cable to a termination panel from a DS3Ch FP
Port on
8W8 pin
faceplate function
8W8 pin
number
BNC label
provided

P0
Rx 4
A8
RX4
Tx 4
A7
TX4
Rx 3
A6
RX3
Tx 3
A5
TX3
Rx 2
A4
RX2
Tx 2
A3
TX2
Rx 1
A2
RX1
Tx 1
A1
TX1
241-1501-200 5.2S2
12-port DS3 FP
For the interface information about the 12-port DS3 FP, see:
Faceplate of a 12-port DS3 FP with PEC NTHR23 (page 186)

The figure includes the mapping of port numbers to connector pins.
Information on assigning port connections is described in 241-1501-240
Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Installation, Maintenance and
Upgrade.
12-port DS3 FP line connections (page 187)
12-port DS3 FP cable assemblies (page 187)
The software name (card type) of the NTHR23 is 12pDS3Atm. The DS

version of this card shares the same PEC and software name.
5.2S2

Figure 49
Faceplate of a 12-port DS3 FP with PEC NTHR23
8W8 D-sub
interface connector
Pin A8
Latch for seating

Status LEDs
to sparing panel
Pin A1
P2
5 ground
4 PS status
3 PS load
6 ground
Rx11
Tx11
Rx10
Tx10
Rx9
Tx9
Rx8
Tx8
P6
P1
P0
Rx7
Tx7
Rx6
Tx6
Rx5
Tx5
Rx4
Tx4
Rx3
Tx3
Rx2
Tx2
Rx1
Tx1
Rx0
Tx0
P5
P4
Control
ports
P3
Latch for
seating
Mini-coax ports
PPT 2822 010 AA2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
12-port DS3 FP line connections

network equipment or another DS3 FP, or indirectly through the 12-port
fanout panel NTHW52 or the one-for-six 12-port sparing panel NTQS31.
Refer to Termination panels for FPs (page 291) for the description,
function, and capabilities of the panels.
When connecting a DS3 to a fanout panel, up to three DS3 8W8-to-BNC
cable assemblies are required. When connecting a DS3 to a one-for-six
sparing panel, up to three DS3 8W8-to-8W8 mini-coax cable assemblies are
required from each FP. To operate the sparing panel, a single DS3 DB9
sparing control cable assembly is required.
12-port DS3 FP cable assemblies

Passport 15000 or 20000 uses mini-coax cables that are high-density 75-ohm
BNC cables with 8W8 and BNC connectors. Each 8W8 connector is
D-shaped with eight connections, four pairs of transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx)
connections for four ports. Each 12-port DS3 FP accommodates three 8W8
connectors, labeled P0, P1, and P2. (Some 4-port DS3s have only one 8W8
connector.) The other end of the cable can have either
another 8W8 connector intended for connection with sparing panel

NTQS31
a corresponding series of 8 standard BNCs intended for connection with

a fanout panel (for example, NTHW52)
(CPE) is 137 m (450 ft). The distance between the FP and the sparing panel
or fanout panel is part of the total length.
Note: The insertion loss of the mini-coax cables is approximately double
that of standard NT-734 cable, which will affect the maximum cable
distance.
A 12-port DS3 uses three 4-port cable assemblies and three control port
cables.
5.2S2
The table Cable assemblies for a DS3 FP (page 188) lists the available
prefabricated cables.
Table 35
Cable assemblies for a DS3 FP
PEC
Description
Length
NTHR58
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR59
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR60
15 m (49 ft)
NTHR72
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR73
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR74
15 m (49 ft)
NTHR69
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR70
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR71
15 m (49 ft)
specifications:


sparing D-sub connector in the figure Faceplate of a 12-port DS3 FP
with PEC NTHR23 (page 186) to determine the orientation of the
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Refer to the inset of the control port in the figure Faceplate of a 12-port DS3
FP with PEC NTHR23 (page 186). The PS is the power supply. Both ends
of the cable have the same pinout, and the control port pinout is the same for
all DS3 and E3 cards.
For the mapping of traffic port numbers to connector pins, see the figures
Faceplate of a 12-port DS3 FP with PEC NTHR23 (page 186) and Labels
of mini-coax and BNC cable connections on a 4-port NTHR58 cable
assembly (page 190), and the table Mapping an 8W8 and BNC cable to a
termination panel from a 12-port DS3 FP (page 191). Information about
Note: Unlike the Passport 7400 series FP faceplates, the Passport 15000
or 20000 has the ports numbered from bottom to top. The reversal is
required to accommodate the downwards cable management.
5.2S2

Figure 50
RX4
To P0, P1, or P2
TX4
RX3
Heat
shrink
Tie-wrap
TX3
RX2
NTHR58
label
Mini-coax
cable cluster
TX2
RX1
Pin A8
Orientation
space
Pin A1
TX1
Cable
label
Heat
shrink
PPT 2950 001 AA2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Table 36
Mapping an 8W8 and BNC cable to a termination panel from a 12-port DS3 FP
Port on
8W8 pin
faceplate function
8W8 pin
number
BNC label
provided

P2
Rx 4
A8
RX4
Tx 4
A7
TX4
Rx 3
A6
RX3
Tx 3
A5
TX3
Rx 2
A4
RX2
Tx 2
A3
TX2
Rx 1
A2
RX1
Tx 1
A1
TX1
Rx 4
A8
RX4
Tx 4
A7
TX4
Rx 3
A6
RX3
Tx 3
A5
TX3
Rx 2
A4
RX2
Tx 2
A3
TX2
Rx 1
A2
RX1
Tx 1
A1
TX1
Rx 4
A8
RX4
Tx 4
A7
TX4
Rx 3
A6
RX3
Tx 3
A5
TX3
Rx 2
A4
RX2
Tx 2
A3
TX2
Rx 1
A2
RX1
Tx 1
A1
TX1
P1
P0
5.2S2
Assigning sparing panel connections for a 12-port DS3 or E3

FP
Logically assign a connection from a specific slot on an FP to a specific
connection on the sparing panel, and align it with a connection to each
connection of all equipment between the sparing panel and the far-end final
termination of the FP connection. Choose the sparing panel connections
before doing the cabling procedure. Record each port connection at the
faceplate of all equipment on a site record and on labels for the cables and
panels. Some sparing panel faceplates have writable labels for each
connection.
For the 12-port and 4-port cards that have the 8W8 mini-coax D-sub
connectors on the faceplate, the actual port numbers are not indicated on the
other end of the prefabricated signaling cables. The other end can be another
8W8 or a cluster of 8 BNC cables numbered 1 to 8. The pattern of pin (port)
numbering is the same for all mini-coax connectors. Use the following to
determine the port-to-port connections:
the figure Labels of mini-coax and BNC cable connections on a 4-port

NTHR58 cable assembly (page 170)
the figure Port mappings of the 8W8 cable connections of a 12-port DS3
or E3 FP (page 193)
the table Mapping an 8W8 and BNC cable to a termination panel from
a DS3Ch FR FP (page 171)
Note that BNC 1 to 8 labels correspond to 8W8 pins A1 to A8 respectively,

but the actual port number depends on whether the cable is plugged into P0,
P1, or P2. In the figure Port mappings of the 8W8 cable connections of a
12-port DS3 or E3 FP (page 193), the port mappings of P0 apply to any of
the 4-port FPs with the 8W8 mini-coax D-sub connectors.
The 12-port DS3 or E3 sparing panel NTQS31 can operate as a fanout panel
for up to six DS3 or E3 FPs with 8W8 connectors, that is, with no sparing.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 51
Port mappings of the 8W8 cable connections of a 12-port DS3 or E3 FP
8W8 D-sub
interface connector
Pin A8
Latch for seating

Status LEDs
to sparing panel
Pin A1
P2
5 ground
4 PS status
3 PS load
6 ground
Rx11
Tx11
Rx10
Tx10
Rx9
Tx9
Rx8
Tx8
P6
P1
P0
Rx7
Tx7
Rx6
Tx6
Rx5
Tx5
Rx4
Tx4
Rx3
Tx3
Rx2
Tx2
Rx1
Tx1
Rx0
Tx0
P5
P4
Control
ports
P3
Latch for
seating
Mini-coax ports
PPT 2822 010 AA2
5.2S2

Table 37
Mapping of 8W8 and BNC connectors for ports P0, P1, and P2
Port on
8W8 pin
faceplate function
8W8 pin
number
BNC label
provided

P2
Rx 11
A8
BNC 8
<node_id>/<fp_slot_no>/P2/Rx11/A-BNC8
Tx 11
A7
BNC 7
<node_id>/<fp_slot_no>/P2/Tx11/A-BNC7
Rx 10
A6
BNC 6
Tx 10
A5
BNC 5
Rx 9
A4
BNC 4
Tx 9
A3
BNC 3
Rx 8
A2
BNC 2
Tx 8
A1
BNC 1
Rx 7
A8
BNC 8
Tx 7
A7
BNC 7
Rx 6
A6
BNC 6
Tx 6
A5
BNC 5
Rx 5
A4
BNC 4
Tx 5
A3
BNC 3
Rx 4
A2
BNC 2
Tx 4
A1
BNC 1
Rx 3
A8
BNC 8
Tx 3
A7
BNC 7
Rx 2
A6
BNC 6
Tx 2
A5
BNC 5
Rx 1
A4
BNC 4
Tx 1
A3
BNC 3
Rx 0
A2
BNC 2
Tx 0
A1
BNC 1
P1
P0
241-1501-200 5.2S2
12-port E3 ATM FP
For the interface information about the 12-port E3 ATM FP, see:
Faceplate of a 12-port DS3 FP with PEC NTHR23 (page 186)

The figure includes the mapping of port numbers to connector pins.
Information on assigning port connections is described in 241-1501-240
Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Installation, Maintenance and
Upgrade.
12-port E3 FP line connections (page 197)
12-port E3 FP cable assemblies (page 197)
The software name (card type) of the NTHR23 is 12pDS3Atm. The DS

version of this card shares the same PEC and software name.
5.2S2

Figure 52
Faceplate of a 12-port E3 FP with PEC NTHR25
8W8 D-sub
interface connector
Pin A8
Latch for seating

Status LEDs
to sparing panel
Pin A1
P2
5 ground
4 PS status
3 PS load
6 ground
Rx11
Tx11
Rx10
Tx10
Rx9
Tx9
Rx8
Tx8
P6
P1
P0
Rx7
Tx7
Rx6
Tx6
Rx5
Tx5
Rx4
Tx4
Rx3
Tx3
Rx2
Tx2
Rx1
Tx1
Rx0
Tx0
P5
P4
Control
ports
P3
Latch for
seating
Mini-coax ports
PPT 2822 010 AA2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
12-port E3 FP line connections

You can connect the lines (ports) of this E3 FP directly to the far end network
equipment or another E3 FP, or indirectly through the 12-port fanout panel
NTHW52 or the one-for-six 12-port sparing panel NTQS31. Refer to
Termination panels for FPs (page 291) for the description, function, and
capabilities of the panels.
When connecting a E3 to a fanout panel, up to three E3 8W8-to-BNC minicoax cable assemblies are required. When connecting a E3 to a one-for-six
sparing panel, up to three E3 8W8-to-8W8 mini-coax cable assemblies are
required from each FP. To operate the sparing panel, a single E3 DB9 sparing
control cable assembly is required.
12-port E3 FP cable assemblies

Passport 15000 or 20000 uses mini-coax cables that are high-density 75-ohm
BNC cables with 8W8 and BNC connectors. Each 8W8 connector is
D-shaped with eight connections, four pairs of transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx)
connections for four ports. Each 12-port E3 accommodates three 8W8
connectors, labeled P0, P1, and P2. (A 4-port E3 has only one 8W8
connector.) The other end of the cable can have either
another 8W8 connector intended for connection with sparing panel

NTHR39
a corresponding series of 8 standard BNCs intended for connection with

a fanout panel (for example, NTHW52)
The maximum cable length for unbalanced E3 lines to customer premises

equipment (CPE) is 350 m (1148 ft). The distance between the FP and the
sparing panel or fanout panel is part of the total length.
The insertion loss of a cable must not exceed 12 dB measured at 17184 kHz.
For example, for NT-734 cable, an insertion loss of 12 dB at 17184 kHz is
about 350 m (1148 ft) of cable.
5.2S2
Note: The insertion loss of the mini-coax cables is approximately double

that of standard NT-734 cable, which will affect the maximum cable
distance.
A 12-port E3 uses three 4-port cable assemblies and three control port cables.
The table Cable assemblies for an E3 FP (page 198) lists the available
prefabricated cables.
Table 38
Cable assemblies for an E3 FP
PEC
Description
Length
NTHR58
E3 male 8W8 mini-coax to male BNC
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR59
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR60
15 m (49 ft)
NTHR72
E3 male 8W8-to-8W8 male mini-coax
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR73
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR74
15 m (49 ft)
NTHR69
E3 DB9 sparing control port
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR70
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR71
15 m (49 ft)
specifications:

241-1501-200 5.2S2

sparing D-sub connector in the figure Faceplate of a 12-port E3 FP with
PEC NTHR25 (page 196) to determine the orientation of the
Refer to the inset of the control port in the figure Faceplate of a 12-port E3
FP with PEC NTHR25 (page 196). The PS is the power supply. Both ends
of the cable have the same pinout, and the control port pinout is the same for
all DS3 and E3 cards.
For the mapping of traffic port numbers to connector pins, see the figures and
Labels of mini-coax and BNC cable connections on a 4-port NTHR58 cable
assembly (page 200), and in the table Mapping an 8W8 and BNC cable to
a termination panel from a 12-port E3 FP (page 201). Information about
Note: Unlike the Passport 7400 series FP faceplates, the Passport 15000
or 20000 has the ports numbered from bottom to top. The reversal is
required to accommodate the downwards cable management.
5.2S2

Figure 53
RX4
To P0, P1, or P2
TX4
RX3
Heat
shrink
Tie-wrap
TX3
RX2
NTHR58
label
Mini-coax
cable cluster
TX2
RX1
Pin A8
Orientation
space
Pin A1
TX1
Cable
label
Heat
shrink
PPT 2950 001 AA2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Table 39
Mapping an 8W8 and BNC cable to a termination panel from a 12-port E3 FP
Port on
8W8 pin
faceplate function
8W8 pin
number
BNC label
provided

P2
Rx 4
A8
RX4
Tx 4
A7
TX4
Rx 3
A6
RX3
Tx 3
A5
TX3
Rx 2
A4
RX2
Tx 2
A3
TX2
Rx 1
A2
RX1
Tx 1
A1
TX1
Rx 4
A8
RX4
Tx 4
A7
TX4
Rx 3
A6
RX3
Tx 3
A5
TX3
Rx 2
A4
RX2
Tx 2
A3
TX2
Rx 1
A2
RX1
Tx 1
A1
TX1
Rx 4
A8
RX4
Tx 4
A7
TX4
Rx 3
A6
RX3
Tx 3
A5
TX3
Rx 2
A4
RX2
Tx 2
A3
TX2
Rx 1
A2
RX1
Tx 1
A1
TX1
P1
P0
5.2S2
2-port general processor with disk

For the interface information about the 2-port GP with disk (2-port GPDsk),
see:
Faceplate of a 2-port GPDsk with PEC NTHW10 (page 203)
2-port GPDsk components (page 203)
2-port GPDsk pinout and signal names (page 204)
100BaseT Ethernet cable assembly (page 204)
The software name (card type) of the NTHW10 is 2pGPDsk.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 54
Faceplate of a 2-port GPDsk with PEC NTHW10
Status LEDs
Upper card latch
Clock crossover P4
V.24 DCE operator port P3
(not supported)
10 BT debug port P2
(not supported)
100 BT Ethernet port P1

100 BT Ethernet port P0
Lower card latch
PPT 3002 001 AA3
2-port GPDsk components

The 2pGPDsk consists of a motherboard, a memory daughter card, and a
power supply daughter card, with a hard disk mounted on the motherboard.
5.2S2
The 2pGPDsk connects to the shelf backplane, providing an interface to both

fabric cards.
2-port GPDsk pinout and signal names

See the table Ethernet connector pinouts (page 158) for the faceplate
connection assignments. The pinouts apply to both 10BaseT and 100BaseT
connectors.
Note: The 10Base-T Ethernet debug port is not supported.
Table 40
Ethernet connector pinouts
Pin number
Signal name
Tx +
Tx -
Rx +
not used
not used
Rx -
not used
not used
100BaseT Ethernet cable assembly

The minimum grade of cable required for a 100BaseT Ethernet port is
Category 5 unshielded twisted pair (UTP). Some installations may require a
higher grade cable (for example, Enhanced Category 5 UTP cabling) to
overcome cross-talk, immunity, and other noise problems.
Note: In order to meet Class B electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
requirements, use shielded twisted pair (STP) cabling.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
4-port Gigabit Ethernet FP

The 4-port Gigabit Ethernet (4pGe) FP provides four full-duplex Gigabit
Ethernet ports (also known as optical module sockets). Separately ordered
small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver modules are required to
provide optical signal reception and transmission. The 4pGe requires that an
SFP module be plugged into each of its four optical module sockets (ports) in
order for the card to operate. For the general description of what an SFP is,
see SFP optical module (page 288).
For the interface information about the 4-port Gigabit Ethernet FP, see:
Faceplate of a 4-port Gigabit Ethernet FP with PEC NTHW49

(page 206); for the description of the port LEDs on the faceplate, see
Status LEDs of the Ethernet ports on an NTHW49 (page 359)
4-port Gigabit Ethernet cable assemblies (page 206)
Custom-making an LC cable assembly for an NTHW49 (page 207)
SFP modules for an NTHW49 (page 208)
The software name (card type) of the NTHW49 is 4pGe.
5.2S2

Figure 55
Faceplate of a 4-port Gigabit Ethernet FP with PEC NTHW49
Status LEDs
LED windows
Fiber hood
Upper card
latch
Optical module
sockets
Hood captive
screw
Status LEDs
Cable guides
Lower card
latch
PPT 3217 002 AB3
4-port Gigabit Ethernet cable assemblies

With a 4-port Gigabit Ethernet card (NTHW49), use single-mode (SM) or
multimode duplex fiber cable with small-form duplex LC connectors at the
FP end. Each port on the card requires a small-form pluggable (SFP) module
241-1501-200 5.2S2
that plugs into the faceplate. The fiber cable plugs into the SFP. The version
of SFP that you chose determines the type of fiber cable (SM or MM) that you
will need. Refer to SFP modules for an NTHW49 (page 208).
The signal distance with the gigabit Ethernet ports is described in Custommaking an LC cable assembly for an NTHW49 (page 207).
Custom-making an LC cable assembly for an NTHW49

The sum of cable losses and connection losses from the FP to the far end
termination depends on the installed and software-configured type of SFP
optical transceiver. For a 1000BASE-SX SFP module, MM cable and
connection losses must not exceed 7.5 dB. For a 1000BASE-LX SFP module,
SM cable and connection losses must not exceed 10.5 dB. The losses in a
transmission path from the fiber cable, splices, and connectors determine the
distance that the FP can send a signal.
Make an LC cable assembly for an optical module for an NTHW49 FP using
the following specifications:
mutlimode (MM) fiber or single-mode (SM) fiber, depending on the type

of optical module already installed
duplex fiber cables (recommended to facilitate lesser cable densities)

with colour-coded halves
a core diameter of 50 microns or 62.5 microns for MM, and 9 microns

for SM
a cladding diameter of 125 microns
a maximum MM cable length for 50 microns is 550 m (1,804 ft.) and for
62.5 microns is 275 m (902.27 ft.)
a maximum SM cable length is 10 km (6.2 miles)
duplex LC connectors at the FP end, and any other fiber connector you
choose at the far end from the FP
attenuation between end-points is not required for LX optical modules

using single-mode cable
see the figure The LC cable assembly with duplex connectors and
duplex cables (page 235) for the limitations of lengths of the cable neck
parts
5.2S2
SFP modules for an NTHW49

More than one version of small-form pluggable (SFP) modules can be used
per NTHW49 FP. The type of fiber cable must match the version of module,
and all modules interface with small-form LC connectors.
The PEC versions of SFP modules that can be used with the NTHW49 are:
NTTP01AB, 1000BASE-SX for multimode (MM) fiber cables for short

reach (SR) up to 0.55 km (0.31 mi) when using 50/125 fiber or up to
0.275 km (0.17 mi) when using 62.5/125 fiber, and with a nominal
wavelength of 850 nm
NTTP01CB, 1000BASE-LX for single-mode (SM) fiber cables for

intermediate reach (IR) up to 10 km (6.25 mi) and with a nominal
wavelength of 1310 nm
The general description and purpose of SFPs is in SFP optical module

(page 288).
241-1501-200 5.2S2
32-port E1 TDM FP
For the interface information about the 32-port E1 time division multiplexing
(TDM) FP, see:
Faceplate of a 32-port E1 TDM with PEC NTHW92 (page 210)
32-port E1 TDM line connections (page 211)
32-port E1 TDM cable assemblies (page 211)

(page 213)
The software name (card type) of the NTHW92 is 32pE1Aal.
5.2S2

Figure 56
Faceplate of a 32-port E1 TDM with PEC NTHW92
Status LEDs
Sparing connector
P6
Transmit (Tx)
Ports 1 to 16
Receive (Rx)
Card latches
Transmit (Tx)
Ports 17 to 32
Receive (Rx)
Monitor ports 1-16
Monitor ports 17-32
Coax connector
PPT 2973 002 AA2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
32-port E1 TDM line connections

You can connect the lines (ports) of this E3 FP directly to the far end network
equipment or another E3 FP, or indirectly through
a multiport aggregate device identified by PEC NT0486
the 3-port DS3, E3, or E1 one-for-one sparing panel NTFP99AA
the 12-port DS3 fanout panel NTHW52
Refer to Termination panels for FPs (page 291) for the description,
function, and capabilities of the device or the panels.
The connections can be made to equivalent non-Nortel Networks equipment
provided the cabling criteria are met.
32-port E1 TDM cable assemblies

The maximum cable length for lines between the FP and the multiport
aggregate device is 350 m (1150 ft). The distance between the FP and the
sparing panel is part of the total length. The insertion loss of a cable must not
exceed 12 dB measured at 17184 kHz.
The table Cable assemblies for a 32-port TDM FP (page 211) lists the
available prefabricated cables. The cable assemblies with standard male BNC
connectors at both ends can be connected to either another FP, the
NTFP99AA sparing panel, the NTHW52 fanout panel, or other compatible
equipment.
Table 41
Cable assemblies for a 32-port TDM FP
PEC
Description
Length
NTFP19AD
3.0 m (9.8 ft)
NTFP19AE
15 m (49 ft)
NTHR69
2.5 m (8 ft)
NTHR70
5 m (16 ft)
NTHR71
15 m (49 ft)
5.2S2
You can custom make your own traffic port cables to connect the FP to the
other end connections by using the specifications in the table Cable
assembly parts for a 32-port E1 TDM FP (page 212). The port connections
are identified in the figure Faceplate of a 32-port E1 TDM with PEC
NTHW92 (page 210).
Table 42
Cable assembly parts for a 32-port E1 TDM FP
Item
Description
at the FP faceplate, a male coax connector 75-ohm straight or right-angle

crimp-on male BNC plug
(connector)
cable NT-734 or comparable cable such as 75-ohm coaxial cable with
RG-59/U
double shielded construction
at the sparing panel faceplate, a male
connector 28P387-1 (straight) or 28P388 crimp-on male BNC plug
(right-angle) made by Specialty Connector (connector)
Company, or a comparable one
specifications:


sparing D-sub connector in the figure Faceplate of a 32-port E1 TDM
with PEC NTHW92 (page 210) to determine the orientation of the
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Refer to the inset of the control port in the figure Faceplate of a 32-port E1
TDM with PEC NTHW92 (page 210). Both ends of the cable have the same
pinout, and the control port pinout is the same for all DS3 and E3 cards.
For more information, see Cables and cable management (page 315).

The 32-port E1 TDM function processor uses a sparing panel to support
one-for-one sparing and multiport aggregate devices for customer equipment
connections. The figure Cable connections between two 32-port E1 TDM
FPs and a 3-port sparing panel NTFP99 (page 214) shows the connection
endpoints between the spared FPs and their sparing panel. It also identifies the
endpoints at the sparing panel from the far-end or next-hop CPE, in this case
from a multiport aggregate device.
The sparing panel NTFP99 can also be deployed as a one-for-one fanout
panel (or patch panel) provided the connections are to the Main Tx and Rx
ports Main.
5.2S2

Figure 57
Cable connections between two 32-port E1 TDM FPs and a 3-port sparing panel NTFP99
P1 TX
P1 RX
P0 TX
P0 RX
Monitor P2
P1 TX
LINE
P1 RX
LINE
P0 TX
LINE
P0 RX
LINE
Monitor P1
P1 TX
P1 RX
P0 TX
P0 RX
Monitor P0
To next equipment
towards or at the
far end
PPT 2175 002 AC2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
6-module packet server FP

The 6-module packet server service processor is a FP that provides extensive
computing power through its six PCI mezzanine cards (PMC). Initially, the
wireless service radio network controller (RNC) interface node uses the
packet server FP to support radio bearer processing and protocol conversion.
Using the capabilities of the packet server, the Passport 15000 or 20000
supports the development of wireless internet. In the future, other CPUintensive applications will develop new uses for the card.
The product engineering code (PEC) of the 6-module packet server FP is
NTHW18. The software name of the FP is 6mPktServSP.
See the figure Faceplate of a 6-module packet server service processor with
PEC NTHW18 (page 216).
5.2S2

Figure 58
Faceplate of a 6-module packet server service processor with PEC NTHW18
Status LEDs
Card latches
PPT 2973 003 AA2
For more information on the 6mPktServSP FP, see these sections
6mPktServSP components (page 217)
6mPktServSP sparing (page 217)
241-1501-200 5.2S2
6mPktServSP configuration (page 217)
6mPktServSP components
The 6mPktServSP FP consists of
a motherboard containing two PMCs, the ATM management hardware,

and the processor block
a PCI PMC daughter card containing four PMCs and the ATM
segmentation and reassembly (SAR) processors
a PUPS daughter card containing the 3.3 V and 5 V point-of-use power

supplies (PUPS)
The 6mPktServSP connects to the shelf backplane, providing an interface to

both fabric cards. The 6mPktServSP FP has no external ports.
In the wireless RNC application, the 6mPktServSP FP supports these
functions
high-touch bearer processing
radio protocol handling
macro-diversity handover
ATM adaptation layer protocol conversion
6mPktServSP sparing
There is no sparing arrangement for the 6mPktServSP FP in its current usage.
It is the responsibility of the application running on the FP to arrange software
sparing. In the case of the wireless RNC interface node application, the
master PMC module in the shelf, which is called the PMC Manager
(PMC-M), has a standby PMC-M module. The standby PMC-M takes over
the master functions if the main PMC-M fails.
6mPktServSP configuration
The 6mPktServSP FP has no external connections or ports that need
configuration. The card type value <cardtype> for the FP is 6mPktServSP.
5.2S2
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FPs

For the interface information about the 4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP, see:
4-port OC-3/STM-1 FP identifiers (page 218)
Faceplate of a 4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP (page 219)
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP cable assembly (page 220)
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP optical interface characteristics

(page 220)
Table 43
4-port OC-3/STM-1 FP identifiers
FP name
PEC of PQC6v2 PEC of

(or PQC2)
PQC12
Software name
(card type)
4-port OC-3/STM-1
multimode ATM
NTHR17
NTHW05 4pOC3MmAtm
4-port OC-3/STM-1
single-mode
intermediate reach ATM
NTHR21
NTHW15 4pOC3SmIr
Note: The CA vintage or higher is required to support hitless software

migration and equipment protection features.
When a specific identifier is not mentioned, the text applies to both PQC
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 59
Faceplate of a 4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP
Status LED
LED windows
Fiber cable hood
Upper card
latch
P3
P2
Fiber cable
ports
P1
Hood captive
screw
P0
Cable guides
Tx
Rx
Lower card
latch
PPT 2822 024 AA2
5.2S2
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP cable assembly

The fiber mode type must be the same as the FP mode type. You must provide
the cable with attached connectors. Use single-mode (SM) fiber cable with
single-mode FPs and multimode (MM) fiber cable with multimode FPs.
Multimode fiber cable must conform to ANSI/E1A/T1A-568. The multimode
fibre cable must have a core diameter of 62.5 microns and a cladding diameter
of 125 microns. The modal bandwidth is at least 500 MHz-km and the
attenuation is less than 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm.
Single-mode fiber cable must have a core diameter of 9 microns and a
cladding diameter of 125 microns. The attenuation is less than 0.5 dB/km at
1300 nm.
The OC-3 uses standard duplex SC connectors.
The sum of cable losses and connector losses from the FP to customer
premises equipment (CPE) must not exceed 10 dB for multimode cable and
12 dB for single-mode cable. The losses in a transmission path determine the
distance the FP can send a signal. The maximum distance from the FP to CPE
is 2 km for multimode cable and 15 to 20 km for single-mode cable,
depending on the losses due to splices and connectors.

The optical interface characteristics for the 4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM singlemode (SM) intermediate reach (IR) and multimode (MM) FP are shown in
these tables
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM general interface characteristics (page 221)
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM SM IR FP transmit characteristics

(page 221)
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM SM IR FP receive characteristics (page 221)
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM MM FP transmit characteristics (page 222)
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM MM FP receive characteristics (page 222)
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Table 44
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM general interface characteristics
General optical interface characteristics
Faceplate connector
dual SC transceiver for simplex cable connectors
Bit rate
155.520 Mbit/s
Line encoding
binary non-return-to-zero (NRZ)
Table 45
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM SM IR FP transmit characteristics
Transmit characteristic
Value
Emission wavelength
1261 to 1360 nm
Attenuation
0 to 12 dB
Maximum dispersion
96 ps/nm
Maximum RMS spectral width
7.7 nm
Mean transmission power
-15 to -8 dBm
Minimum extinction ratio
8.2 dB
Eye pattern mask
Compliant with ITU G.957 Fig 2,

ANSI T1E1.2/94-002R1-Fig 10,
TA-253 Issue 8 Fig 4-2
Side node suppression ratio (SSR)
not applicable
Table 46
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM SM IR FP receive characteristics
Receive characteristic
Value
Maximum receive power (average)
-8 dBm
Minimum receive power (average)
-28 dBm
Optical path power penalty
1 dB
Maximum received reflectance
not applicable
5.2S2

Table 47
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM MM FP transmit characteristics
Value
Emission wavelength
1270 to 1380 nm
Attenuation
0 to 10 dB
Maximum dispersion
18 ps/nm
80 nm
-20 to -14 dBm
8.2 dB
Eye pattern mask
not applicable
not applicable
Table 48
4-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM MM FP receive characteristics
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Value
-14 dBm
-30 dBm
1 dB
not applicable
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP

For the interface information about the 4-port OC-3/STM-1 channelized FP
with time division multiplexing (TDM) for circuit emulation services (CES),
see:
Faceplate of a 4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP with PEC

NTHW70 (page 224)
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP cable assembly (page 225)
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP optical interface characteristics

(page 225)
The software name (card type) of the NTHW70 is 4pOC3ChSmIr.
5.2S2

Figure 60
Faceplate of a 4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP with PEC NTHW70
Status LED
LED windows
Fiber cable hood
Upper card
latch
P3
Fiber cable
ports
P2
P1
P0
Tx
Rx
Hood captive
screw
Cable guides
Lower card
latch
PPT 3133 001 AA2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP cable assembly

Use only single-mode (SM) fiber cable with the 4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch
TDM/CES FP. You must provide the cable with attached connectors.
1300 nm.
The 4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP uses standard duplex SC
connectors.
premises equipment (CPE) must not exceed 12 dB for single-mode cable. The
losses in a transmission path determine the distance the FP can send a signal.
The maximum distance from the FP to CPE is 15 to 20 km for single-mode
cable, depending on the losses due to splices and connectors.
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP optical interface

characteristics
The optical interface characteristics for the 4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch
single-mode (SM) TDM/CES FP are shown in these tables
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP general interface characteristics

(page 225)
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP transmit characteristics

(page 226)
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP receive characteristics

(page 226)
Table 49
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP general interface characteristics
Faceplate connector
Bit rate
155.520 Mbit/s
Line encoding
5.2S2

Table 50
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP transmit characteristics
Value
Emission wavelength
1260 nm to 1360 nm
Attenuation
0 to 12 dB
Maximum dispersion
96 ps/nm
7.7 nm
-15 to -8 dBm
8.2 dB
Eye pattern mask

ANSI T1E1.2/94-002R1-Fig 10,
not applicable
Table 51
4-port OC-3/STM-1Ch TDM/CES FP receive characteristics
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Value
-8 dBm
-31 dBm
not applicable
not applicable
16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP with MT-RJ connectors

For the interface information about the 16-port OC-3/STM-1 FP with MT-RJ
connectors, see:
Faceplate of a 16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP with MT-RJ connectors

with PEC NTHW21 (page 228)
Note: If your card has PEC NTHW31, see 16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM
FP with LC connectors (page 231)
Optical interface characteristics for an NTHW21 (page 229)
The software name (card type) of the NTHW21 is 16pOC3SmIrAtm.
5.2S2

Figure 61
Faceplate of a 16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP with MT-RJ connectors with PEC NTHW21
Status LEDs
LED windows
Fiber hood
Hood captive
screw
Upper latch
P7
15
(Port 15)
Fibre cable
ports
Transmit
Receive
P0
(Port 0)
10
P9
P8
Fiber port
Cable guides
Lower latch
PPT 2925 003 AA2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Cable assemblies for an NTHW21

The fiber mode type must be the same as the FP mode type. You must provide
the cable with attached connectors.
With an NTHW21 FP, use single-mode (SM) fiber cable with a core diameter
of 9 microns and a cladding diameter of 125 microns. The attenuation is less
than 0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm.
Use SM MT-RJ female (non-pinned) connectors at the FP end. Both the
transmit and the receive ports are in the same connector.
The sum of cable losses and connector losses from the FP to the far end
termination must not exceed 12 dB for SM cable. The losses in a transmission
path determine the distance the FP can send a signal. The maximum distance
from the FP to the far end is 15 to 20 km for SM cable, depending on the
losses due to splices and connectors.
Optical interface characteristics for an NTHW21

The optical interface characteristics for a 16-port OC-3/STM-1 single-mode
(SM) intermediate reach (IR) FP with MT-RJ connectors that has PEC
NTHW21 are shown in these tables:
General interface characteristics for an NTHW21 (page 229)
Transmit characteristics for an NTHW21 (page 230)
Receive characteristics for an NTHW21 (page 230)
Table 52
General interface characteristics for an NTHW21
Faceplate connector
duplex MTRJ male (pinned) transceiver
Bit rate
155.520 Mbit/s
Line encoding
5.2S2

Table 53
Transmit characteristics for an NTHW21
Value
Emission wavelength
1261 nm to 1360 nm
Attenuation
0 to 12 dB
Maximum dispersion
96 ps/nm
7.7 nm
-15 to -8 dBm
8.2 dB
Eye pattern mask

ANSI T1E1.2/94-002R1-Fig 10,
not applicable
Table 54
Receive characteristics for an NTHW21
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Value
-8 dBm
-28 dBm
1 dB
not applicable
16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP with LC connectors

For the interface information about the 16-port OC-3/STM-1 FP with LC
connectors, see:
Faceplate of a 16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP with LC connectors with

PEC NTHW31 (page 232)
Note: If your card has PEC NTHW21, see 16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM
FP with MT-RJ connectors (page 227).
The software name (card type) of the NTHW31 is 16pOC3SmIrAtm.
5.2S2

Figure 62
Faceplate of a 16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM FP with LC connectors with PEC NTHW31
Status LEDs
LED windows
Fiber hood
Hood captive
screw
Upper latch
P7
Port 15
Tx
Rx
Rx
Tx
Port 0
Fibre cable
ports
10
P9
P8
Cable guides
Lower latch
PPT 2925 003 AB2
241-1501-200 5.2S2

With an NTHW31 FP, use single-mode (SM) fiber cable with small-form LC
connectors at the FP end.
termination must not exceed 12 dB for SM cable. The losses in a transmission
path determine the distance the FP can send a signal. The maximum distance
from the FP to the far end is 15 to 20 km for SM cable, depending on the
losses due to splices, repeaters, and connectors.
You must custom make your cable assemblies. Follow the specifications in
Cable specifications for custom-making an LC cable assembly (page 276).
Cable specifications for custom-making LC cable assemblies

Make an LC cable assembly using the following specifications. Refer also to
the figure The LC cable assembly with duplex connectors and duplex
cables (page 235).
Use single-mode (SM) fiber with a core diameter of 9 microns and a

cladding diameter of 125 microns.
Use duplex fiber cables to provide lesser cable volumes and easier cable
management under the hood.
The outside diameter of one SM cable must not exceed 1.6 mm

(0.0629 inch). The combined outside width of two cables zipped together
to make a duplex cable must not exceed 3.2 mm (0.1259 inch) as shown
in the figure The LC cable assembly with duplex connectors and duplex
cables (page 235). The thinner cable allows the fiber hood on the
faceplate to close over the entire cluster of cables without pinching them
and can allow the duplex cable to be ravelled onto the tray of a fiber
management unit (NTHW50).
Note: Ladder rackable cable (especially at 3.0 mm) cannot be used.
Use duplex small-form LC connectors at the FP end especially since the

Tx and Rx transceivers are opposite on each side of the faceplate, and any
other fiber connector you choose at the next hop from the FP.
5.2S2
Use color-coded shrink wrap at the connectors to indicate parallel Tx and

Rx connections of the ends. The total length of the shrink wrap should
not exceed 2.6 cm (1.0 inch). The shrink wrap should extend from the
rear of the connector through the strain relief (neck reinforcement) with
up to 1.0 cm (0.394 in.) exposed, as indicated in the figure The LC cable
assembly with duplex connectors and duplex cables (page 235).
After each connector, add a stiff strain relief no longer than 1.6 cm
(0.63 in.), as indicated in the figure The LC cable assembly with duplex
connectors and duplex cables (page 235). Applying a coating of
resilient gap filler between the cable and the strain relief is determined by
the manufacturer of the cable assembly.
The combined measurements of connector, strain relief, and shrink wrap

must accommodate the curve of the hood on the FP faceplate so that the
hood can be closed without pinching any cables.
Cables should be manufactured and verified to comply with Telcordia

GR-326 specifications.
If required, use an attenuation less than 0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 63
The LC cable assembly with duplex connectors and duplex cables
11.6 cm (4.6 in.)
Dust
cap
Strain
relief
Colour-coded
shrink wrap
3.2 mm
(0.1259 in.)
Duplex fiber
optic cable
Duplex LC
connector
Label positioned
outside of
closed hood
Keyway guide
Duplex clip
(various shapes)
1.0 cm
(0.394 in.)
1.6 cm
(0.63 in.)
Ferrule
Tab to engage
connector
PPT 3175 001 AB6

The optical interface characteristics for a 16-port OC-3/STM-1 ATM singlemode (SM) intermediate reach (IR) FP with LC connectors that has PEC
NTHW31 are shown in these tables:
Transmit characteristics for an NTHW31 (page 236)
Receive characteristics for an NTHW31 (page 237)
5.2S2

Table 55
Faceplate connector duplex small-form LC transceiver for duplex fiber
cables
Bit rate
155.54 Mbit/s
Line encoding
Table 56
Transmit characteristics for an NTHW31
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
Emission wavelength
1261
1360
nm
Attenuation
12
dB
Maximum dispersion
96
96
ps/nm
not applicable
7.7
-15
-8
dBm
8.2
not applicable dB
Eye pattern mask
Compliant with ITU G.957 Fig 2, ANSI

T1E1.2/94-002R1-Fig 10, TA-253 Issue
8 Fig 4-2
Compliant with ITU G.957 and
Telcodia TR-NWT-000253
Side node suppression ratio (SSR) not applicable
241-1501-200 5.2S2
not applicable

Table 57
Receive characteristics for an NTHW31
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
Receive power (average)
-28
-8
dBm
Receive sensitivity at eye center

(average)
-31.8
dBm
Receive sensitivity at window

edge (average)
-31
dBm
Receive power (average)
-28
-8
dBm
dB
not applicable not applicable
5.2S2
16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FP

The 16-port OC-3/STM-1 packet over SONET (POS) and asynchronous
transfer mode (ATM) function processor (FP) requires control processor 3
(CP3) cards in the same shelf to enable operation. For the interface
information about the 16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FP, see:
Faceplate of a 16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FP with PEC

NTHW44 (page 239)
SFP modules for an NTHW44 (page 240)

(page 244)
The software name (card type) of the NTHW44 is 16pOC3PosAtm.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 64
Faceplate of a 16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FP with PEC NTHW44
Status LEDs
LED windows
Fiber hood
Upper card
latch
Port 15
Port 14
Optical module
sockets
Hood captive
screw
Tx
Rx
Rx
Tx
Port 0
Port 1
Cable guides
Lower card
latch
PPT 3397 002 AA2
5.2S2

With the NTHW44 card, use single-mode (SM) or multimode (MM) duplex
fiber cable with small-form duplex LC connectors at the FP end. Each port on
the card requires a small-form pluggable (SFP) module that plugs into the
faceplate. The fiber cable plugs into the SFP. The version of SFP that you
chose determines the type of fiber cable (SM or MM) that you will need.
Refer to SFP modules for an NTHW44 (page 240).
When dual NTHW44 cards are configured in software for Y-protection, see
Specifications for Y-splitter cable assemblies for Y-protection (page 246).
The sum of cable losses and connection losses from the FP to the far end
termination depends on the installed and software-configured type of SFP
optical transceiver. For an OC-3 SR-0 SFP module, MM cable and connection
losses must not exceed 10 dB. For an OC-3 IR-1/S-1.1 SFP module, SM cable
and connection losses must not exceed 12 dB. For an OC-3 LR-1/L-1.1 SFP
module, SM cable and connection losses must be between 10 to 28 dB, and if
less than 10 dB the connection needs an optical attenuator.The losses in a
transmission path from the fiber cable, splices, and connectors determine the
distance the FP can send a signal.
You must custom make your cable assemblies. Follow the specifications in
Cable specifications for custom-making LC cable assemblies (page 244).
SFP modules for an NTHW44

More than one version of SFP module can be used per FP. The type of fiber
cable must match the version of module, and all modules interface with smallform LC connectors. The PEC versions of SFP modules that can be used with
the NTHW44 are:
NTTP02AD for MM fiber cables for short reach (SR-0) up to 2 km

(1.2 mi) and with a nominal wavelength of 1310 nm
NTTP02CD for SM cables for intermediate reach (IR-1/S-1.1) up to

15 km (9.3 mi) and with a nominal wavelength of 1310 nm
NTTP02ED for SM cables for long reach (LR-1/L-1.1) up to 40 km

(24.8 mi) and with a nominal wavelength of 1310 nm
241-1501-200 5.2S2
The general description and purpose of SFPs is in SFP optical module

(page 288).
The descriptions of cable assemblies are in Cable assemblies for an
NTHW44 (page 240) and Cable specifications for custom-making LC
cable assemblies (page 244).

The optical interface characteristics for a 16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and
ATM FP that has PEC NTHW44 are shown in these tables:
Transmit characteristics for an NTHW44 with MM SR-0 SFP modules

(page 242)
Receive characteristics for an NTHW44 with MM SR-0 SFP modules

(page 242)
Transmit characteristics for an NTHW44 with SM IR-1/S-1.1 SFP

modules (page 242)
Receive characteristics for an NTHW44 with SM IR-1/S-1.1 SFP

modules (page 243)
Transmit characteristics for an NTHW44 with SM LR-1/L-1.1 SFP

modules (page 243)
Receive characteristics for an NTHW44 with SM LR-1/L-1.1 SFP

modules (page 244)
Table 58
Faceplate connector SFP duplex LC (duplex small-form LC transceiver for
duplex fiber cables)
Bit rate
155.52 Mbit/s per port simultaneously
Line encoding
5.2S2
Table 59
Transmit characteristics for an NTHW44 with MM SR-0 SFP modules
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
Emission wavelength
1270
1380
nm
Attenuation
10
dB
Maximum dispersion
not applicable
18
ps/nm
not applicable
80
nm
Mean transmission power for

multimode (MM)
-20
-14
dBm
Extinction ratio
8.2
not applicable dB
Eye pattern mask
not applicable
not applicable
not applicable
Table 60
Receive characteristics for an NTHW44 with MM SR-0 SFP modules
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
Receive power for single-mode

intermediate reach (IR)
-30
-14
dBm
not applicable 1
dB
Table 61
Transmit characteristics for an NTHW44 with SM IR-1/S-1.1 SFP modules
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
Emission wavelength
1261
1360
nm
Attenuation
12
dB
Maximum dispersion
not applicable
96
ps/nm
(Sheet 1 of 2)
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Transmit characteristics for an NTHW44 with SM IR-1/S-1.1 SFP modules
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
not applicable
7.7
nm

single-mode (SM) intermediate
reach (IR)
-15
-8
dBm
8.2
not applicable dB
Eye pattern mask

ANSI T1E1.2/94-002R1-Fig 10,
not applicable
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Table 62
Receive characteristics for an NTHW44 with SM IR-1/S-1.1 SFP modules
Minimum
Maximum
Unit

intermediate reach (IR)
-28
-8
dBm
not applicable 1
dB
Table 63
modules
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
Emission wavelength
1263
1360
nm
Attenuation
10
28
dB
Maximum dispersion
not applicable
not applicable ps/nm
not applicable
not applicable
(Sheet 1 of 2)
5.2S2

modules
Minimum
Maximum
Unit

-5
single-mode (SM) long reach (LR)
dBm
10
not applicable dB
Eye pattern mask
Compliant with Telcordia

GR-253-CORE and ITU G.957
Side node suppression ratio (SSR) 30
not applicable dB
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Table 64
Receive characteristics for an NTHW44 with SM LR-1/L-1.1 SFP modules
Minimum
Maximum
Unit

(SM) long reach (LR)
-34
-10
dBm
not applicable 1
dB

Make an LC cable assembly using the following specifications. Refer also to
the figure The LC cable assembly with duplex connectors and duplex
cables (page 246).
Use multimode (MM) fiber with a core diameter of 50 microns or 62.5

microns and a cladding diameter of 125 microns.
Use single-mode (SM) fiber with a core diameter of 9 microns and a

cladding diameter of 125 microns.
Use duplex fiber cables to provide lesser cable volumes and easier cable
management under the hood.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
The outside diameter of one SM cable must not exceed 1.6 mm

(0.0629 inch). The combined outside width of two cables zipped together
to make a duplex cable must not exceed 3.2 mm (0.1259 inch) as shown
in the figure The LC cable assembly with duplex connectors and duplex
cables (page 235). The thinner cable allows the fiber hood on the
faceplate to close over the entire cluster of cables without pinching them
and can allow the duplex cable to be ravelled onto the tray of a fiber
management unit (NTHW50).
Note: Ladder rackable cable (especially at 3.0 mm) cannot be used.
Use duplex small-form LC connectors at the FP end especially since the

Tx and Rx transceivers are side-by-side in the faceplate, and any other
fiber connector you choose at the next hop from the FP.
Use color-coded shrink wrap at the connectors to indicate parallel Tx and

Rx connections of the ends. The total length of the shrink wrap should
not exceed 2.6 cm (1.0 inch). The shrink wrap should extend from the
rear of the connector through the strain relief (neck reinforcement) with
up to 1.0 cm (0.394 in.) exposed, as indicated in the figure The LC cable
assembly with duplex connectors and duplex cables (page 235).
After each connector, add a stiff strain relief no longer than 1.6 cm
(0.63 in.), as indicated in the figure The LC cable assembly with duplex
connectors and duplex cables (page 235). Applying a coating of
resilient gap filler between the cable and the strain relief is determined by
the manufacturer of the cable assembly.
The combined measurements of connector, strain relief, and shrink wrap

must accommodate the curve of the hood on the FP faceplate so that the
hood can be closed without pinching any cables.
Cables should be manufactured and verified to comply with Telcordia

GR-326 specifications.
5.2S2

Figure 65
The LC cable assembly with duplex connectors and duplex cables
11.6 cm (4.6 in.)
Dust
cap
Strain
relief
Colour-coded
shrink wrap
3.2 mm
(0.1259 in.)
Duplex fiber
optic cable
Duplex LC
connector
Label positioned
outside of
closed hood
Keyway guide
Duplex clip
(various shapes)
1.0 cm
(0.394 in.)
1.6 cm
(0.63 in.)
Ferrule
Tab to engage
connector
PPT 3175 001 AB6
Specifications for Y-splitter cable assemblies for Y-protection

A fiber optical Y-splitter cable connects two adjacent NTHW44 FPs to a
single fiber optical interface at the far end. See the figure The connection
setup of a fiber optical duplex Y-splitter cables used for Y-protection
(page 248). The far end can be:
another NTHW44 in a Passport 15000 or 20000
an OC-3 in any other Passport
a non-Passport card
241-1501-200 5.2S2
You must use Y-splitter cables that have been made according to the
following specifications, criteria, and considerations.
Use the same specifications as listed in Cable specifications for custommaking LC cable assemblies (page 244) except you can only use the
duplex single-mode (SM) type. At the FP end of the cables, you must use
small-form LC connectors. At the single end of the cable (the far end
from the FPs), the connectors are determined by whatever type of optical
interface you have for that port. Nortel Networks does not support
mixing single-mode and multimode at opposite ends of a connection. If
you must have MM at the far end:
keep the total distance of the path less than 100 m (328 ft)
use an appropriate attenuator on the receive (Rx) port (the
241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Installation,
Maintenance and Upgrade has the procedure for handling
attenuators)
Use only the small-form pluggable (SFP) optical module with PEC
NTTP02CD, as described in SFP modules for an NTHW44
(page 240). Refer also to the figure An example of a fiber optical duplex
Y-splitter cable assembly used for Y-protection (page 249).
The Y-splitter cable coupler must provide an equal split of the optical
signals, where each split signal meets or exceeds physical layer
requirements for intermediate reach (IR) under Telcordia GR253. The
legs of the cable after the split must be equal in length.
The position of the coupler on each cable relative to all three ends of the
cable is critical for having effective cable management. Plan the length
of each installed cable especially between the port on the installed FP and
along the absolute cable path up to the nearest cable management bracket
so that its coupler:
will not reside under an FP hood or anywhere across the front of the
shelf
will not reside in a drawer of the fiber management unit (NTHW50)
resides on the side of the NEBS 2000 frame or equivalent mounting
apparatus, or beyond, but not through or on any of the cable
management brackets
5.2S2
You must address appropriate power budgeting of the FP lasers when

mixing single-mode (SM) and multimode (MM) signals. The attenuation
for the Y-splitter cable cannot exceed 10 db when multimode is receiving
from single-mode. When connecting optical interface cards, Nortel
Networks does not recommend mixing single-mode and multimode,
especially when a distance greater than 100 m (328 ft) causes various
kinds of signal degradations.
Note: Since the coupler (splitter) typically attenuates the signal, you
must also address the power budgeting between SM interfaces
throughout the connection.
The behaviour of FPs when cabled with Y-splitter cable assemblies is

described in 241-5701-600 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Configuration
Guide in the section about understanding Y-protection for dual FPs.
Figure 66
The connection setup of a fiber optical duplex Y-splitter cables used for Y-protection
Y-Splitter cable
Tx
Rx
Service Active FP
To far-end
interface
Rx
Tx
Tx
Rx
Rx
Tx
Tx
Rx
Hot Standby FP
Tx
Rx
PPT 3468 001 AA
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 67
An example of a fiber optical duplex Y-splitter cable assembly used for Y-protection
L1 + coupler + L2 = maximum length of the cable type for the FP

Size and type
of coupler varies
L2
L1
Fits under the
hood of an FP
Fits under the

hood of an FP
To FP1
To far
end
To FP2
Type of connector
depends on
far-end optical
interface
Duplex singlemode cable
Positioned
under the hood
with no slack
Positioned
under the hood
with no slack
Label of
Rx or Tx
Installed position
must be outside
the Passport 15000
or 20000 cable
management channel
Small-form LC
connectors for
FP NTHW44
PPT 3467 001 AA
5.2S2
1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP
For the interface information about the 1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP, see:
Faceplate of a 1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP with PEC NTHR29 (page 251)
1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP cable assembly (page 252)
1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP optical interface characteristics (page 252)
The software name (card type) of the NTHR29 is 1pOC12SmLrAtm.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 68
Faceplate of a 1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP with PEC NTHR29
Status LED
LED windows
Fiber cable hood
Upper card
latch
P1
Fiber cable ports
Hood captive
screw
P0
Cable guides
Tx
Rx
Lower card
latch
PPT 2822 023 AA2
5.2S2
1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP cable assembly

Use only single-mode (SM) fiber cable with the 1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP. You
must provide the cable with attached connectors.
The SM fiber cable must have a core diameter of 9 microns and cladding
diameter of 125 microns. The attenuation is less than 0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm.
The sum of cable splice losses and connector losses from the FP to customer
premises equipment (CPE) must not exceed 12 dB for SM cable. The losses
in a transmission path determine the distance the FP can send a signal. The
maximum distance from the FP to CPE is 15 to 20 km for SM cable,
depending on the losses due to splices and connectors.
1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP optical interface characteristics

The optical interface characteristics for the 1-port OC-12/STM-4 singlemode (SM) long reach (LR) FP are shown in these tables
1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP general interface characteristics (page 252)
1-port OC-12/STM-4 SM LR FP transmit characteristics (page 253)
1-port OC-12/STM-4 SM LR FP receive characteristics (page 253)
Table 65
1-port OC-12/STM-4 FP general interface characteristics
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Faceplate connector
Bit rate
622 Mbit/s
Line encoding
Binary non-return-to-zero (NRZ)

Table 66
1-port OC-12/STM-4 SM LR FP transmit characteristics
Transmit characteristics
Value
Emission wavelength
1280 to 1335 nm
Attenuation
0 - 12 dB
Maximum dispersion
not applicable
1 nm (full spectral width at 20 dB)
+2 to -3 dBm
10 dB
Eye pattern mask

ANSI T1E1.2/94-002R1-Fig 10,
30 dB
Table 67
1-port OC-12/STM-4 SM LR FP receive characteristics
Receive characteristics
Value
-8 dBm
-28 dBm
1 dB
-14 dB
5.2S2
4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM FP

For the interface information about the 4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM FP, see:
4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM identifiers (page 254).
Faceplate of a 4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM FP with PEC NTHW11 or

NTHW86 (page 255)
4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM FP cable assembly (page 256)

(page 256)
Table 68
4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM identifiers
FP
PQC6v2 (also
known as PQC2)
PQC12
Software name
(card type)
4-port OC-12/STM-4
NTHW11
NTHW86
4pOC12SmIrAtm
When a specific PEC is not mentioned, assume the text applies to both PQC
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 69
Faceplate of a 4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM FP with PEC NTHW11 or NTHW86
Status LED
LED windows
Fiber cable hood
Upper card
latch
P3
P2
Fiber cable
ports
P1
Hood captive
screw
P0
Cable guides
Tx
Rx
Lower card
latch
PPT 2822 024 AA2
5.2S2
4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM FP cable assembly

Use only single-mode (SM) fiber cable with the 4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM
FP. You must provide the cable with attached connectors.
The single-mode fiber cable must have a core diameter of 9 microns and
1300 nm.

The optical interface characteristics for the 4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM
single-mode (SM) intermediate reach (IR) FP are shown in these tables
4-port OC-12/STM-4 ATM FP general interface characteristics

(page 256)
4-port OC-12/STM-4 SM IR ATM FP transmit characteristics

(page 257)
4-port OC-12/STM-4 SM IR ATM FP receive characteristics

(page 257)
Table 69
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Faceplate connector
Bit rate
622 Mbit/s
Line encoding

Table 70
4-port OC-12/STM-4 SM IR ATM FP transmit characteristics
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
Transmission laser power
-15
-8
dBm
Emission wavelength (center)

nominal 1310 nm
1274
1356
nm
Maximum optical path attenuation
12
dB
Maximum dispersion
not applicable
not applicable
Spectral width
not applicable
2.5
Extinction ratio
8.2
not applicable dB
SONET eye pattern mask
Compliant with Telcordia GR-253 and

ITU-T G.957
Jitter generation

ITU-T G.958
not applicable
nm
not applicable
Table 71
4-port OC-12/STM-4 SM IR ATM FP receive characteristics
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
Receive laser power
-28
-8
dBm
Sensitivity
not applicable
-28
dBm
Overload
-8
not applicable
dBm
Center wavelength
1261
1580
nm
not applicable
dB
not applicable
-27
dB
Jitter tolerance

ITU-T G.958
5.2S2
1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP with APS

For the interface information about the 1-port OC-48/STM-16 FP with APS,
see:
Faceplate of a 1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP with APS with PEC

NTHW01 (page 259)
1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP with APS cable assembly (page 260)

characteristics (page 260)
The software name (card type) of the NTHW01 is 1pOC48ChSmIrAtm.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 70
Faceplate of a 1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP with APS with PEC NTHW01
Status LED
LED windows
Fiber cable hood
Upper card
latch
Port P0
Hood captive
screw
Tx
Rx
Duplex adapter
for fiber cables
Cable guides
Lower card
latch
PPT 2822 025 AA2
5.2S2
1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP with APS cable assembly

Use only single-mode (SM) fiber cable with the 1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM
FP with APS. You must provide the cable with attached connectors.
1300 nm.
The OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP uses standard duplex SC connectors.
premises equipment (CPE) must not exceed 12 dB for single-mode
intermediate-reach cable. The losses in a transmission path determine the
distance the FP can send a signal. The maximum distance from the FP to CPE
is typically less than 34 km (21 miles) for single-mode intermediate reach
cable with 0.35 dB/km fiber, and depending on the losses due to splices and
connectors.

characteristics
The optical interface characteristics for the 1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP
with APS are shown in these tables

(page 260)
1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP transmit characteristics (page 261)
1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP receive characteristics (page 261)
Table 72
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Faceplate connector
duplex SC adapter
Bit rate
2.488 Gbit/s
Line encoding

Table 73
1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP transmit characteristics
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
Emission wavelength
1260
1360
nm
Attenuation
12
dB
Maximum dispersion
n/a
n/a
Spectral width
n/a
n/a
Mean transmission power (launch)
-5.0
0.0
Extinction ratio
8.2

ITU-T G.957
Jitter generation

ITU-T G.958
n/a
dBm
dB
n/a
Table 74
1-port OC-48/STM-16 ATM FP receive characteristics
Minimum
Sensitivity
Overload
Maximum
Unit
-18
dBm
0.0
dBm
dB
Received reflectance
-27
dB
Jitter tolerance and transfer
Compliant with Telcordia GR-253

and ITU-T G.958
5.2S2
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP

For the interface information about the 1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP, see:
Faceplate of a 1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP with PEC NTHW39

(page 263)
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP cable assembly (page 263)
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP optical interface characteristics

(page 264)
The software name (card type) of the NTHW39 is 1pOC48SmIrPos.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 71
Faceplate of a 1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP with PEC NTHW39
Status LED
LED windows
Fiber cable hood
Upper card
latch
Tx
Port P0
Rx
Duplex adapter
for fiber cables
Hood captive
screw
Cable guides
Lower card
latch
PPT 3113 001 AB2
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP cable assembly

Use only single-mode (SM) fiber cable with the 1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS
FP. You must provide the cable with attached connectors.
cladding diameter of 125 microns. The attenuation must be less than 0.5 dB/
km at 1310 nm.
The OC-48/STM-16 POS FP uses standard duplex SC connectors.
5.2S2
The sum of all fiber splice losses, fiber attenuation losses, and connector
losses from the FP to its intended destination must not exceed 8 dB. The
maximum intended optical link length for the single-mode (SM) short reach
(SR) 1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP is 2 km (1.25 miles).
A repeater is required for distances that are greater than 2 km (1.25 miles)
and/or when the link loss in the transmission path is greater than 8 dB.
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP optical interface characteristics

The optical interface characteristics for the 1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS
single-mode (SM) short reach (SR) FP are shown in these tables
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP general interface characteristics

(page 264)
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS SM SR FP transmit characteristics

(page 264)
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS SM SR FP receive characteristics

(page 265)
Table 75
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS FP general interface characteristics
Faceplate connector
duplex SC adapter
Bit rate
2.488 Gbit/s
Line encoding
Table 76
Minimum
Maximum
Unit
Emission wavelength
1265
1360
nm
Maximum dispersion
n/a
n/a
Spectral width
n/a
(Sheet 1 of 2)
241-1501-200 5.2S2
nm

Minimum
Maximum
Unit
Mean transmission power (launch)
-10.0
-3.0
dBm
Extinction ratio
8.2

ITU-T G.957
Jitter generation

ITU-T G.958
n/a
dB
n/a
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Table 77
1-port OC-48/STM-16 POS SM SR FP receive characteristics
Minimum
Sensitivity
Overload
Maximum
Unit
-18
dBm
-3.0
dBm
dB
Received reflectance
-27
dB
Jitter tolerance and transfer
Compliant with Telcordia GR-253

and ITU-T G.958
5.2S2
1-port STM-1Ch FP
For the interface information about the 1-port STM-1 FP, see:
Faceplate of a 1-port STM-1 FP with PEC NTHR83 (page 266)
1-port STM-1 FP cable assembly (page 267)
1-port STM-1 FP optical interface characteristics (page 267)
The software name (card type) of the NTHR83 is 1pSTM1ChSmIr.

Figure 72
Faceplate of a 1-port STM-1 FP with PEC NTHR83
Status LED
LED windows
Fiber cable hood
Fiber cable port

P0
Tx
Rx
Card
latches
Hood captive
screw
Cable guides
PPT 2904 001 AA2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
1-port STM-1 FP cable assembly

Use only single-mode (SM) fiber cable with the 1-port STM-1 FP. You must
provide the cable with attached connectors.
The single-mode fiber cable must have a core diameter of 9 microns and a
1300 nm.
1-port STM-1 FP optical interface characteristics

The optical interface characteristics for the 1-port STM-1 single-mode (SM)
intermediate reach (IR) FP are shown in these tables
1-port STM-1 FP general interface characteristics (page 267)
1-port STM-1 SM IR FP transmit characteristics (page 268)
1-port STM-1 SM IR FP receive characteristics (page 268)
Table 78
1-port STM-1 FP general interface characteristics
Faceplate connector
simplex single-mode SC transceiver
Bit rate
155.520 Mbit/s
Line encoding
5.2S2

Table 79
1-port STM-1 SM IR FP transmit characteristics
Value
Emission wavelength
1261 to 1360 nm
Attenuation
0 to 12 dB
Maximum dispersion
96 ps/nm
7.7 nm
-15 to -8 dBm
8.2 dB
Eye pattern mask

ANSI T1E1.2/94-002R1-Fig 10,
not applicable
Table 80
1-port STM-1 SM IR FP receive characteristics
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Value
-8 dBm
-28 dBm
1 dB
not applicable
VPN extender card

The VPN extender card (VpnXc) is a processor card for IP services. IP
services use the VpnXc to provide enhanced IP-VPN scalability without
impacting the multi-service performance of Passport 15000 or 20000. The
VPN extender card is used to host all the virtual routers (VRs) that support
IP-VPN services. The VPN extender card allows IP-VPN services to scale
well beyond the capabilities of a CP only scenario.
The product engineering code (PEC) of the VPN extender card for
Passport 15000 or 20000 is NTHW30.
See the figure Faceplate of a VPN extender card with PEC NTHW30
(page 270).
5.2S2

Figure 73
Faceplate of a VPN extender card with PEC NTHW30
Status LEDs
Upper card latch
Port 4
(not supported)
V.24 DCE operator port 3
(not supported)
10 BaseT debug port 2
(not supported)
100 BaseT Ethernet port 1

(not supported)
Port 0
Lower card latch
PPT 3002 001 AB4
241-1501-200 5.2S2
See these sections for more information on the VPN extender card
VpnXc components (page 271)
VpnXc configuration (page 271)
VpnXc sparing (page 271)
VpnXc compliance with standards (page 272)
VpnXc components
The VPN extender card consists of a motherboard, a memory daughter card,
and a power supply daughter card, with a hard disk mounted on the
motherboard.
Note: The hard drive on the VpnXc is for future use and is not supported.
The VpnXc connects to the shelf backplane, providing an interface to both
fabric cards.
The VpnXc interface supports these functions
16 Mbyte FLASH memory
512 Mbyte DRAM memory

Note: The VPN extender card has a 10Base-T Ethernet debug port and
two 100Base-T Ethernet ports that are for future use and are not
supported.
VpnXc configuration
The VPN extender card has no external connections or ports that require
configuration. The card type value <cardtype> is VpnExtender or VpnXc for
the VPN extender card. For more information on configuring Passport 15000
or 20000 FPs, see 241-5701-600 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Configuration
Guide.
VpnXc sparing
The VPN extender card supports cold one-for-one sparing. The standby FP is
idle but ready to provide service should the active FP fail. This FP requires no
cabling, therefore, you must provision sparing. The redundant pair of
VPN extender cards do not need to be installed in adjacent slots.
5.2S2
For more information, see 241-5701-600 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000

Configuration Guide.
VpnXc compliance with standards

The VPN extender card is compliant with ISO 8601 and Nortel Networks
Corporate Standard 1805.00.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Voice services processor 2 (VSP2) FP

For the interface information about the VSP 2, see Faceplate of a VSP2 FP
with PEC NTHW87 (page 273). No cables connect to a VSP2.
The software name (card type) of the NTHW87 is VSP2.
Figure 74
Faceplate of a VSP2 FP with PEC NTHW87
Status LEDs
Card latches
PPT 2973 003 AA3
5.2S2
Voice services processor 3 (VSP3) FP

For the interface information about the VSP3, see:
Faceplate of a VSP3 FP with PEC NTHW84 (page 275)
VSP3 line connections (page 275)
VSP3 cable assemblies (page 276)
VSP3 sparing (page 278)
Equipment to interface VSP3 Ethernet ports (page 278)
The software name (card type) of the NTHW84 is 2pGeMmSrVsp3.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 75
Faceplate of a VSP3 FP with PEC NTHW84
Status LED
LED windows
Upper card
latch
Fiber cable hood
P1
Ports
P0
Duplex LC
tranceivers for
gigbit Ethernet
ports
Rx over Tx
Hood captive
screw
Cable guides
Lower card
latch
PPT 3187 001 AA3
VSP3 line connections

The VSP3 card has virtual ports that communicate over the backplane of the
Passport, and has two gigabit Ethernet (gigE) ports. You can use either the
virtual ports or the gigE ports to communicate with an Internet Protocol (IP)
local area network (LAN). Using the gigE ports enables having a direct
Ethernet port connection to an IP network without needing an Ethernet card
as an interface.
5.2S2
The VSP3 can receive signals over the backplane from an ATM interfacing
card in the same shelf, or directly through the gigE ports. Signals can arrive
on the TDM port on the TDM card in the same shelf as the VSP3, and leave
through the gigE ports. The VSP3 always needs a TDM card and a packet port
(such as the gigE ports) in the same shelf.
The gigE ports are used with the PVG base voice-over-IP features (for
example, vgslpGigE and vgslpG729GigE). When both VSP3 gigabit ports are
cabled, all IP packets pass through the ports, including voice, call server
protocol, primary rate interface (PRI) using Q.921, and V5.2 backhaul
signaling.
VSP3 cable assemblies

With the NTHW84 card, use duplex multimode (MM) fiber cable with duplex
LC small-form connectors at the FP end and any other fiber connector at the
other end.
The VSP3 card has two gigabit Ethernet ports on the faceplate. One port is the
standby of the other. For an example, see the figure An example duplex LCto-LC cable assembly (page 277). You must custom make each cable
assembly according to the specifications in Cable specifications for custommaking an LC cable assembly (page 276).
termination must not exceed 7.5 dB for MM cable. The losses in a
transmission path determine the distance the FP can send a signal. The signal
distance with the gigabit Ethernet ports is described in Cable specifications
for custom-making an LC cable assembly (page 276).
Cable specifications for custom-making an LC cable assembly
Make an LC cable assembly for an NTHW84 card using the following
specifications
mutlimode (MM) fiber
duplex fiber cables (recommended to faciliate lesser cable densities) with

colour-coded halves
a core diameter of 50 microns or 62.5 microns
a cladding diameter of 125 microns (the same for either core diameter)
241-1501-200 5.2S2
a maximum cable length for 50 microns at 550 m (1,804 ft.) and for 62.5
microns is 275 m (902.27 ft.)
duplex small-form LC connectors at the FP end, and any other fiber

connector you choose at the far end from the FP
the signal strength reaching the port must be between -3 dbm and
-17 dbm.
attenuation between end-points is not required
Strip back the outside cable sheath to accommodate the curve under the hood
of the FP faceplate, and to accommodate attaching the connector according to
the manufacturers instructions for the connector.
Figure 76
An example duplex LC-to-LC cable assembly
11.6 cm (4.6 in.)
Dust
cap
Strain
relief
Colour-coded
shrink wrap
3.2 mm
(0.1259 in.)
Duplex fiber
optic cable
Duplex LC
connector
1.6 cm
(0.63 in.)
1.0 cm
(0.394 in.)
Label positioned
outside of
closed hood
Keyway guide
Duplex clip
(various shapes)
Ferrule
Tab to engage
connector
PPT 3175 001 AB6
5.2S2
VSP3 sparing
The sparing of a VSP3 can be configured from the end that the virtual ports
or gigabit Ethernet ports connect to. The sparing for VSP3 cards is different
than the usual Passport method of equipment protection because
it depends on the hardware and software configuration of the far-end

equipment that the card connects to
the gigabit Ethernet port sparing is hot protection whereby the standby
port takes over without dropping active calls when a link failure occurs
on the active gigabit Ethernet port
The following hardware sparing configurations are supported
one-for-one (formerly 1:1) or one-for-n (formerly 1:n) inter-card port

sparing, where n is up to 7
one-for-one intra-card port sparing, that is, one gigabit Ethernet port
spares the other on the same card, and by default the port that comes into
service first is automatically the active port
no port sparing for the two gigabit Ethernet ports such that each is
operating independently (the default)
For details about the hardware sparing setup, see the section about VSP3 farend interfacing equipment in 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000
Equipment to interface VSP3 Ethernet ports

When using the virtual ports of the a voice services processor 3 (VSP3)
function processor (FP) card, no cabling from the FP faceplate is required.
The virtual ports communicate through the backplane of the Passport 15000
or 20000.
When using the gigabit Ethernet ports to access an Internet Protocol (IP)
network, the FP must be cabled to various kinds of far-end equipment. The
interfacing equipment depends on what you want the VSP3 to do. For a
further description of what the card does, refer to 241-5701-615 Passport
7400, 15000, 20000 FP Configuration Reference.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
The interfacing equipment also determines the method of sparing VSP3

cards. This section provides
VSP3 far-end interfacing equipment (page 279)
Sparing a VSP3 at the far-end (page 280)
VSP3 far-end interfacing equipment

When using the gigabit Ethernet ports, the ports must be cabled from the FP
faceplate to the far-end equipment. The equipment that can interface the
gigabit Ethernet ports of a VSP3 must have the following specifications for
one-for-one or one-for-n sparing.
a router that
transmits 1000Base-SX short wavelength laser (at 770 to 860 nm)
over multimode (MM) cable
bridges connections
connects other IP subnets
has VRRP (or an equivalent protocol) for router sparing
for example, provides both bridging and VRRP routing capabilities
within the same chassis by bridging through configured port-based
VLANs, as with a Passport 8600
each port connected to a Layer 2 bridge to form part of an Ethernet local

area network (LAN)
Ethernet ports of the VSP3 cards are within the same LAN (although not
necessarily to the same physical bridge)
When the VSP3 is unspared, a direct point-to-point connection to a router

which does not support bridging is possible
each directly-connected VSP3 is placed in a separate IP subnet
the far-end must support auto-negotiation
For an example configuration, refer to the figure Example of spared VSP3

cards in a LAN hardware configuration (page 282).
5.2S2
Sparing a VSP3 at the far-end

The sparing of a VSP3 can be configured through the far-end equipment that
its gigabit Ethernet ports connect to. The intra-card sparing capability
protects the gigabit Ethernet ports from loss of traffic provided both ports are
configured for sparing and the far-end setup criteria are met. The inter-card
sparing capability protects the VSP cards through configured 1-for-one (1:1)
or one-for-n (1:n) sparing. However, during a switchover between cards,
traffic is lost. Combining the sparing of the cards and the gigabit ports
provides fast switchover for link failures and cold switchover for VSP3 cards.
The setup sparing for VSP3 cards involves the following.
It depends on the hardware and software configuration of the far-end

equipment that the card connects to.
The gigabit Ethernet port sparing is hot protection whereby the standby
port takes over without dropping active calls when a link failure occurs
on the active gigabit Ethernet port.
The criteria for the hardware sparing configurations are as follows:
for one-for-one (1:1) or one-for-n (1:n) inter-card port sparing:

the active and the standby cards reside in the same Passport shelf
the cards are cabled to the same LAN (or VLAN), as are all devices
within an IP subnet
the cards belong to the same protection group as designated by
software configuration
the active and standby ports belong to the same IP subnet
one card is configured as the Spare and each other card is configured
as a Main
up to nn cards in the same Passport 15000 or 20000 shelf are
configured for sparing, where nn is 14 FP slots minus however many
TDM cards share the shelf, and the far-end supports sparing that
many VSP3s
for one-for-one (1:1) intra-card port sparing:

the VSP3 software has been configured to enable the sparing and
both are configured under the same logical processor (LP)
241-1501-200 5.2S2
both gigabit Ethernet ports are connected to the same LAN or subnet
for no card sparing between VSP3s, connect the VSP3

Note: Configure both Ethernet ports for sparing at the same time. If you
configure only one of the two Ethernet ports on a VSP3 card, and you
wish to add the second one later, then configure the second port for
sparing and physically connect it. The newly added port becomes the
standby. The only method to trigger a manual switchover between two
spared gigabit Ethernet ports is to delete the configuration of the active
port, thereby forcing a switchover to the standby. Traffic is lost during the
switchover. To provide a standby for the newly active port, then configure
the formerly active port again. It automatically becomes the standby.
A switchover from the active to the standby VSP3 card occurs provided:
the attribute switchoverOnFailure under the component IpInterface is

enabled (for the description of components, refer to 241-5701-060
Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Components)
the PVG application is without an active port for the continuous period
specified by the attribute switchoverHoldoffTime under the component
IpInterface
at least one of the gigabit Ethernet ports has been active since the VSP3
card started up after a reboot or a switchover (which also stops the VSP3
from constantly resetting or switching over when the ports are
disconnected or have failed)
the standby card is in service at the time a switchover is attempted
Cable the sparing connections between each VSP3 and the far-end according
to the capabilities of the far-end equipment. For an example of cable
connections, refer to the figure Example of spared VSP3 cards in a LAN
hardware configuration (page 282).
After powering up both ends of the VSP3 connection, the Ethernet port that
comes up first automatically becomes the active port, and the second one (if
configured for sparing) becomes the standby.
Once both ports are in service, the switchover occurs automatically when the
far-end detects a loss of signal from the active Ethernet port.
5.2S2

Figure 77
Example of spared VSP3 cards in a LAN hardware configuration
Passport 15000
Main Port 1
VSP3 Port 0
Passport 8600
Bridge
X
VRRP
Router
MGC
Main Port 1
VSP3 Port 0
Main Port 1
VSP3 Port 0
Spare Port 1
VSP3 Port 0
Passport 8600
Bridge
Y
IP
network
VRRP
Router
PVG
PPT 3194 001 AA
241-1501-200 5.2S2

(VSP3-o) FP
The voice services processor 3 with optical TDM interface (VSP3-o) FP card
is supported in Packet Voice Gateway (PVG) shelves of a Passport 15000 or
20000.
For the interface information about the VSP3-o FP card, see:
Faceplate of a VSP3-o FP card with PEC NTHW77 (page 284)
VSP3-o FP line connections (page 284)
VSP3-o FP cable assembly (page 285)
VSP3-o FP optical interface characteristics (page 285)
VSP3-o FP sparing (page 287)
The software name (card type) of the NTHW77 is 2pOC3ChSmIrVsp3.
5.2S2

Figure 78
Faceplate of a VSP3-o FP card with PEC NTHW77
Status LED
LED windows
Fiber cable hood
Upper card
latch
Rx
Fiber cable
ports
P1
Tx
P0
Rx
Tx
Hood captive
screw
Cable guides
Lower card
latch
PPT 3404 001 AA2
VSP3-o FP line connections

The VSP3-o FP card has two OC-3/STM-1 optical TDM ports. Only one of
the two OC-3/STM-1 optical TDM ports (ports 0 and 1) is an active port that
communicates with the TDM network. The VSP3-o FP card only supports
internal TDM traffic through the active port 0 of the two OC-3/STM-1 optical
TDM ports on the same VSP3-o FP card. Other TDM FP cards are not
supported by the VSP3-o FP card.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
The VSP3-o FP card can receive IP-routed traffic over the backplane from a
4-port gigabit Ethernet FP card or an ATM IP FP card in the same Passport
shelf, and send the traffic to the TDM network through the active port 0 of the
two OC-3/STM-1 optical TDM ports on the VSP3-o FP card. TDM signals
can arrive on the active port 0 of the two OC-3/STM-1 optical TDM ports on
the VSP3-o FP card, and leave through the 4-port gigabit Ethernet FP card to
the IP network.
VSP3-o FP cable assembly

Use only single-mode (SM) fiber cable with the VSP3-o FP card. You must
provide the cable with attached connectors.
1300 nm.
The VSP3-o FP card uses standard duplex LC connectors.
VSP3-o FP optical interface characteristics
The optical interface characteristics for the VSP3-o FP card are shown in
these tables
VSP3-o FP general interface characteristics (page 286)
VSP3-o FP transmit characteristics (page 286)
VSP3-o FP receive characteristics (page 286)
5.2S2

Table 81
VSP3-o FP general interface characteristics
Faceplate connector
dual LC transceiver for simplex cable connectors
Bit rate
155.520 Mbit/s
Line encoding
Table 82
VSP3-o FP transmit characteristics
Value
Emission wavelength
1260 nm to 1360 nm
Attenuation
0 to 12 dB
Maximum dispersion
96 ps/nm
7.7 nm
-15 to -8 dBm
8.2 dB
Eye pattern mask

ANSI T1E1.2/94-002R1-Fig 10,
not applicable
Table 83
VSP3-o FP receive characteristics
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Value
-8 dBm
-31 dBm
not applicable
not applicable
VSP3-o FP sparing
The sparing of a VSP3-o FP card can be configured from the end that the
virtual ports connect to. The sparing for VSP3-o FP cards is different than the
usual Passport method of equipment protection because
it depends on the hardware and software configuration of the far-end

equipment that the card connects to
The following hardware sparing configurations are supported
one-for-one (formerly 1:1)
For details about the hardware sparing setup, see 241-1501-240 Passport
5.2S2
SFP optical module

A small-form pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver module is a device that
transmits and receives an optical signal to and from an optical fiber. Each
device handles either single-mode (SM) or multimode (MM) fiber cable with
small-form LC connectors plugged into it. The other end of the SFP plugs into
the optical module socket (known as a port in software terms) on the faceplate
of various FPs, for example, the 4-port Gigabit Ethernet (NTHW49) or the
16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM (NTHW44). See the figure A typical
SFP optical module (page 288). When the SFPs are cabled, the hood of the
faceplate closes over them as with any other non-SFP optical FP.
Figure 79
A typical SFP optical module
Open end
is not shown
For LC small
form connector
Plugs into
FP faceplate
(optical module
socket)
Bale latch
Compression
spring
To close latch
PPT 3301 002 AA2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Using SFPs means having SM or MM or a combination of both fibers

interfacing the ports of the same FP. By replacing an SFP with a different
version, you can change the type of fiber connection without having to change
the FP. The FPs with optical module sockets can handle signals from either
SM or MM fibers.
The bale latch on the SFP optical module ensures that the SFP optical module
cannot be removed from the FP until unplugging the fiber.
Each version of optical module uses a specific wavelength laser to transmit
and receive data over a fiber optic cable. The wavelengths are matched to the
type of fiber cable it accommodates and to the strength of the laser, namely
short reach (SR), intermediate reach (IR), or long reach (LR).
When an in-service SFP fails or the inserted SFP does not match what the
socket is configured for in software, alarm 7011 5480 is generated.
An SFP module can be safely removed or inserted without powerng off the
FP.
Note: The SFP optical modules are separately ordered units and should
be tracked as separate products in all respects, including repair and
return. If an SFP optical module fails, only the failed SFP optical module
should be returned and not the FP. If the FP fails, its SFP optical modules
must be removed from the FP before returning the FP.
For more information on fiber cabling, see SFP optical module cable
assemblies (page 290).
To install or replace an SFP optical module, see 241-1501-240 Passport
To configure an Ethernet port with an optical module, see 241-5701-600
Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Configuration Guide.
For information about the SFPs that are available for the FPs that can
accommodate them, see the description of the FP in this chapter.
5.2S2
SFP optical module cable assemblies

With an SFP optical transceiver module, use duplex single-mode (SM) or
multimode (MM) fiber optic cables with duplex LC connectors at the FP end
and any other fiber connector at the other end. Only an SM optical fiber cable
(two 9/125 micron SMF) should be used with an SM SFP optical module.
Only an MM optical fiber cable (two 62.5/125 MMF or two 50/125 MMF)
should be used with an MM SFP optical module.
Additional information about LC cables is provided in the description of each
type of FP that uses them.
Optical module compliances

The SFP optical transceiver modules comply with the following:
ANSI TI.646, SONET specification
IEEE802.3-2002
ITU-T G.957, Optical Interfaces for Equipment and Systems Relating to

SDH
LASER Safety FDA Class 1 as per FDA 21, Chapter 1, Sub-chapter J,

Part 1040.10 dated 4-1-03
LASER Safety IEC Class 1 as per IEC 60825-1 Edition 1.2 dated
2001-08
Telcordia GR-253-CORE, SONET Transport Systems
241-1501-200 5.2S2
291
Chapter 5
Termination panels for FPs
The termination panels that are available to a Passport 15000 or 20000
include fanout panels and sparing panels. These termination panels
interconnect equipment to the function processors (FPs) of a Passport 15000
or 20000 switch.
With a NEBS 2000 frame or equivalent mounting apparatus that houses a
single switch, termination panels can be attached to the empty portion of the
mounting apparatus. In frames containing two Passport switches, a separate
mounting apparatus is required. The 19-inch wide sparing panels that are used
with Passport 15000 or 20000 FPs can be mounted onto a NEBS 2000 frame
using the adapter brackets from kit NTHW14.
The type of cable and connector that is available as prefabricated cable
assemblies and the cable specifications that are required to custom make your
own are provided in the description of each FP that uses the panel. FP
descriptions are in Control and function processors (page 141).
The installation of each termination panel and its cables is in 241-1501-240
The replacement of each termination panel or one of its cables is in
and Upgrade.
The description and capabilities of the Passport 15000 or 20000 termination
panels are in
Basic functionality and operation of a sparing panel (page 292)

5.2S2
292 Chapter 5 Termination panels for FPs
Basic functionality and operation of a fanout panel (page 296)
12-port DS3 or E3 fanout panel NTHW52 (page 297)
12-port DS3 or E3 sparing panel NTQS31 (page 300)
4-port DS3 sparing panel NTHR79 (page 304)
3-port DS3, E3, or E1 sparing panel NTFP99AA (page 306)
Multiport aggregate device for a 32-port E1 TDM (page 308)
Dimensions of the termination panels (page 313)
Basic functionality and operation of a sparing panel

The basic functionality of a sparing panel for a Passport 15000 or 20000 is to
enable equipment protection of one or more FPs of the same type that are
connected to the far end of an FP connection. The FPs connected to the same
sparing panel must be compatible vintages for equipment protection to occur.
A sparing panel is a patch panel with a mechanical relay. Software tells the
relay when to switch the path of traffic from one FP to another. Some sparing
panels can operate as a patch panel (or fanout panel) without sparing.
Of all the FPs connected to a sparing panel, one must be designated in
software as the Spare FP and all other FPs connected to the same panel must
be designated as Main FPs. The Spare FP is the standby FP for one or more
FPs. When a sparing panel supports only one Main FP, it provides
one-for-one equipment protection. When a sparing panel supports more than
one Main FP, it provides one-for-n equipment protection, where n is the
quantity of Main FPs backed up by the one Spare.
The control processor (CP) software controls which FP or FPs actively use the
sparing panel and which one does not or is on standby. When a Main FP fails,
the active CP identifies which Main FP has failed, and instructs the sparing
panel to switch the relay contacts from the failed FP to the standby FP. The
Spare FP becomes an active FP carrying traffic.
A subsequent switchover cannot occur until the failed FP is replaced and
returned to service. With any Passport FP in a one-for-one or one-for-n
configuration, the replacement FP automatically becomes the standby card
and remains standby even if it was previously the active card. If you decide to
restore active traffic to the replaced FP, you must switch it back manually
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Chapter 5 Termination panels for FPs 293
using the appropriate software commands. The switchback behavior for a

1-for-n configuration depends on the software attribute for revertive
equipment protection.
It is expected that you will test a replaced FP while it is on standby, then verify
the operation of the sparing panel.
Some traffic loss occurs between the start of the switchover and the instant
traffic runs through the mate. The amount of loss depends on
the amount of traffic passing through the FP at the time of the switchover
whether the FP supports hot, warm, or cold equipment protection

(sparing)
what services the FP supports, for example a DS3 with IMA can take /
longer than other cards
how much configuration (provisioning) is on the FP, for example, with

one-for-n sparing, the card that fails cannot be predicted so the
configuration cannot be loaded onto the spare card until the failed FP is
identified, and traffic or services cannot run on the card until it is loaded
how fast the mechanical relay is for the specific type of sparing panel (all
the values are in milliseconds)
To determine how much time a switchover can take, monitor the duration for
your particular configuration of services and the amount of traffic passing
through.
When disconnecting cables from the standby FP that uses a sparing panel,
traffic is unaffected provided the active mate remains in service. If you
accidently disconnect an active cable, traffic is lost through that connection
until the cable is re-connected.
For information on configuring the software to facilitate DS3 or E3 sparing,
see 241-5701-600 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000 Configuration Guide. For the
procedures to install, replace or redeploy a sparing panel, see 241-1501-240
For the description and running of card tests, see 241-5701-520 Passport
7400, 15000, 20000 Troubleshooting and Testing.
5.2S2
Common characteristics of a sparing panel

All Passport sparing panels share the following common characteristics. Each
characteristic applies to each sparing panel in this chapter unless otherwise
specified.
A status LED lights to indicate whether the Main or the Spare FP is actively
carrying traffic. Whether the switchover is triggered manually or
automatically by the system, a status LED on the sparing panel indicates the
active FP. When a switchover occurs due to a failed FP or an FP upgrade,
putting the replacement FP in service does not automatically cause a
switchback of activity.
There is a transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) pair of connectors per port. The
connections between the sparing panel, the electrical FPs, and all equipment
up to the far-end connection are intended to be Tx-to-Tx and Rx-to-Rx with
Passport equipment. When the Tx-to-Rx combinations get crisscrossed
between an FP, a termination panel, and the far-end termination, the effect of
one error nullifying another can establish a workable connection. It is
important that you label the connection information of each Tx and Rx
connection onto the end of the cable at each break in the cable path.
The row of ports labelled Pn beside Main on the sparing panel are to be
connected to the same Pn ports on the Main FP. Similarly, the row of Spare
Pn ports are to be connected to the same Pn ports on the Spare FP.
The line ports are to be connected from the other-end equipment to the FP,
such as
another FP of the same type in a compatible vintage
an EdgeLink 100 multiplexor
a multi-port aggregate device
other customer premises equipment (CPE) that is compatible with DS3

technology
The monitor ports are used for connecting test equipment to the sparing panel
to monitor traffic through the ports of the Main or Spare FP, or the line
equipment. Using these ports is your option. Connecting these ports or not has
no effect on the operation of the sparing panel.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
The 19-inch wide sparing panels that are to be mounted on the 21-inch wide
NEBS 2000 frame require the optional adapter brackets from kit NTHW14.
The location of the sparing panel relative to the FPs and the next leg or farend equipment determines the length of cables required. The density of cables
may obstruct air flow that is required to keep the system at a nominal
operating temperature.
Power source of a sparing panel

A sparing panel requires power to light the status LEDs and to enable
software to switch its on-board mechanical relay (or relays) from one FP to
another. A sparing panel gets power through at least one control port cable,
but connecting all control port cables eliminates intermediate or transitory
LED statuses. When power reaches the sparing panel for a power up, whether
or not traffic is passing through the sparing panel, the Main LED lights. If the
standby FP was active at the time power was cut off, the Main connection on
the sparing panel will automatically switch the traffic over to its Spare
connection. The Spare LED lights to confirm it is active.
When both LEDs are not lit, power is not being provided to the sparing panel.
When power is cut off to a sparing panel, neither LED is lit and the switchover
relay either stays at or automatically gets switched to the Main FP as the
default position. If the Main FP was active, that is, already controlling the
traffic, then no traffic is lost, traffic continues to and from the sparing panel,
and without power a switchover of the traffic to the standby (Spare) FP can
no longer occur. If the Main was active, loss of power makes the sparing panel
operate as a one-for-one fanout panel. If the standby FP was active, traffic is
lost until the sparing panel is powered again.
Loss of power to the sparing panel can be caused by unplugging one end of
all control port cables, unseating all FPs, or disrupting any leg of power input
to both FPs. Without power
both sparing panel status LEDs are not lit
traffic can continue through the main connections (behaving as a patch

panel or a one-for-one fanout panel)
traffic cannot continue through the spare connections
a switchover to the spare FP cannot occur
5.2S2
When both FPs are in-service and power to the sparing panel resumes
the LED of the active FP connection lights
with Passport 15000 or 20000 FPs, the status of active traffic through the
sparing panel always aligns with the status of traffic through the FP pair
an automatic or manual switchover to the mate can occur provided it is

in service
Basic functionality and operation of a fanout panel

Fanout panels act as a cable distribution system that provides any of the
following functions, depending on the functional processor (FP) they support.
Fanout panels can
provide a break-out (or fanout) for customer equipment connections so

that each port of an FP has its own termination point and access
provide media conversion
act as a concentrator, reducing the number of cables that are attached to

the front of a Passport 15000 or 20000
provide a common grounding point for cables
determine the type of connection (DCE or DTE) depending on which

connector is used
The connections between the fanout panel, the FPs, and all equipment up to
the far-end connection are intended to be Tx-to-Tx and Rx-to-Rx with
Passport equipment. When the Tx-to-Rx combinations get crisscrossed
Fanout panels do not operate by software or require power. A fanout panel is
effectively a fan-in or fan-out patch panel. Some Passport sparing panels
automatically become a one-for-one fanout panel when power is cut off.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
12-port DS3 or E3 fanout panel NTHW52

The 12-port DS3 or E3 fanout panel NTHW52 is intended as a termination
point between customer premises equipment such as a network interface and
these DS3 or E3 function processors (FPs)
NTHR23, the 12-port DS3 FP (page 185)
NTHR25, the 12-port E3 ATM FP (page 195)
NTHR31, the 4-port DS3Ch ATM FP with IMA (page 175)
NTHR88 or NTHR89, the 4-port DS3Ch FR FP (page 166)
NTHR91, the 4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES (page 180)
NTHW91, the 2-port DS3Ch TDM FP (page 160)
NTHW92, the 32-port E1 TDM FP (page 209)
The NTHW52 has standard coax BNC-to-BNC connections, and allows a

transition from BNC connections to high-density 8W8 mini-coax
connections on the FPs. See the figure A 12-port DS3 or E3 fanout panel
NTHW52 (page 298).
The NTHW52 requires no software or power to operate.
For the size of the panel, see the table Dimensions of fanout and sparing
panels (page 313).
5.2S2
,,
,
,
,,
,
Figure 80
A 12-port DS3 or E3 fanout panel NTHW52
Stamped TOP
Adapter
bracket
BNC-to-BNC
connector
Bolts onto
frame upright
PPT 2822 022 AA
Assigning the fanout panel cable connections
Fanout panel connection assignments are specific to the FP and the fanout
panel being used. Determine your fanout panel connections from Assigning
12-port DS3 or E3 fanout panel connections (page 299).
The sparing panel NTFP99 or NTHR79 can also be deployed as a one-for-one

fanout panel (or patch panel) provided the connections are to the Main Tx and
Rx ports. Refer to the figures in
241-1501-200 5.2S2

(page 164)

(page 213)
Assigning 12-port DS3 or E3 fanout panel connections

Logically assign a connection from a specific slot on an FP to a specific
connection on the fanout panel, and align it with a connection to each
connection of all equipment between the fanout panel and the far-end final
termination of the FP connection.
The 12-port fanout panel has 24 connectors, a transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx)
pair for each port. When cabling Passport FPs and sparing panels, do
Tx-to-Tx and Rx-to-Rx for all equipment from the FP up to the far-end
termination of the FP connection.
The 12-port fanout panel can support three 4-port DS3 or E3 cards from any
shelves.
The sparing panel NTFP99 or NTHR79 can also be deployed as a one-for-one
fanout panel (or patch panel) provided the connections are to the Main Tx and
Rx ports.
5.2S2
12-port DS3 or E3 sparing panel NTQS31

The 12-port DS3 or E3 sparing panel NTQS31 is a patch panel that can fan
out connections to and from the network and also provide one-for-six sparing
(back up). That is, when up to seven FPs from the same shelf are
interconnected through a one-for-six sparing panel, one of the FPs can spare
the other six.
The FPs that can use the NTQS31 as a fanout or a sparing panel include
NTHR23, the 12-port DS3 FP (page 185)
NTHR25, the 12-port E3 ATM FP (page 195)
NTHR88 or NTHR89, the 4-port DS3Ch FR FP (page 166)
In addition to the sparing panel information provided in Basic functionality

and operation of a sparing panel (page 292), the NTQS31 has the following
distinguishing characteristics.
When the 12-port DS3 or E3 sparing panel is used with 4-port FPs, you must
logically assign the same Pn ports on the panel to the Pn ports on the FP. For
example, if P0 on the first FP is connected to sparing panel P1, then P0 of all
other FPs in the same sparing group must be connected to the other sparing
panel P1s. This is made clear in the FP cabling procedures of 241-1501-240
The faceplate has standard female BNC connectors for the signaling ports,
standard female DB9 connectors for the control ports, and proprietary female
8W8 D-sub mini-coax connectors from the FPs. See the figure A 12-port
DS3 or E3 one-for-six fanout sparing panel NTQS31 (page 302).
241-1501-200 5.2S2
The size of the panel is in the table Dimensions of fanout and sparing panels
(page 313). Although the NTQS31 is designed for a 21-inch wide mounting
apparatus, it has a second set of mounting holes to enable fastening it to the
rails of a Passport 7400 19-inch wide cabinet.
5.2S2

Figure 81
A 12-port DS3 or E3 one-for-six fanout sparing panel NTQS31
Connections
from network
Mounting holes for

21-inch wide frame
Transmit monitor
coax connector
Coax connector
Connections
from switch
Monitor port
selecting
buttons
Status
LEDs
Mounting holes for

19-inch wide frame
Cover
Display indicating
selected monitor
ports
D-sub
connector
Mini-coax
connector
Screw
PPT 2819 017 AA2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Testing a transmit port on the NTQS31

The one-for-six sparing panel also has the hardware capability for monitoring
any transmit port on a specific FP. (No software is involved in monitoring.)
The transmit monitor provides access to the transmit (Tx) signal of a port for
monitoring by customer premises test equipment, for example, to verify the
initial setup of confidence checking. If the external test equipment indicates a
problem, then the DS3 or E3 FP and the cable to the port must be tested.
The monitoring signal is 25 dB lower than the transmit signal so that the
transmission is insignificantly affected.
Selection of the FP and transmit port must be done at the panel by two push
buttons located above the sparing status LEDs on the control module. FP
numbers are 1 to 6. Port numbers are indicated in hexadecimal from 0 (zero)
to b. The FP and port numbers each have their own LED display beside the
selection buttons.
5.2S2
4-port DS3 sparing panel NTHR79

The 4-port DS3 sparing panel NTHR79 provides one-for-one sparing for
these FPs

and operation of a sparing panel (page 292), the NTHR79 has the following
distinguishing characteristics.
The NTHR79 is a Class B device for electromagnetic interference (EMI).
The NTHR79 can be used as a patch panel without sparing (like a one-for-one
fanout panel) for one DS3 card provided the signaling and control port cables
are connected to the respective Main ports on the sparing panel.
The faceplate has standard female BNC connectors for the signaling ports and
female DB9 connectors for the control ports. The monitor ports are also
75-ohm BNC connectors. See the figure A 4-port DS3 one-for-one 19-inch
sparing panel NTHR79 (page 305).
To facilitate more effective cable management, the faceplate includes spaces
for writing port connection information.
The size of the panel is in the table Dimensions of fanout and sparing panels
(page 313).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 82
A 4-port DS3 one-for-one 19-inch sparing panel NTHR79
For the control port cable

from the Spare FP
Female BNC connector
Status LED of the

Spare FP
Mounting
ear
For the control port
cable from Main FP
Status LED of the

Main FP
2 Us
high
From the far-end

connections of the FP ports
From the Spare FP,
Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx
P3 TX
P3 RX
P2 TX
P2 RX
P1 TX
P1 RX
P0 TX
P0 RX
MONITOR MONITOR
P1
P3
P3 TX
LINE
P3 RX
LINE
P2 TX
LINE
P2 RX
LINE
P1 TX
LINE
P1 RX
LINE
P0 TX
LINE
P0 RX
LINE
MONITOR MONITOR
P0
P2
P3 TX
P3 RX
P2 TX
P2 RX
From the Main FP,

P1 TX
P1 RX
P0 TX
P0 RX
For port test equipment

PPT 3205 001 AA
5.2S2
3-port DS3, E3, or E1 sparing panel NTFP99AA

A 3-port DS3, E3, or E1 sparing panel NTFP99AA provides one-for-one
sparing to the

and operation of a sparing panel (page 292), the NTFP99AA has the
following distinguishing characteristics.
The NTFP99AA has standard coax BNC-to-BNC connections. See the figure
A 3-port DS3, E3, or E1 one-for-one 19-inch sparing panel NTFP99AA
(page 307).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 83
A 3-port DS3, E3, or E1 one-for-one 19-inch sparing panel NTFP99AA
For the control port cable

from the Spare FP
Female BNC connector
Status LED of the

Spare FP
Mounting
ear
For the control
port cable from
Main FP
Status LED of the

Main FP
From the far-end

connections of the
FP ports
2 Us
high
From the Spare FP,

P2 TX
P2 RX
P1 TX
P1 RX
P0 TX
P0 RX
MONITOR P2
P2 TX
LINE
P2 RX
LINE
P1 TX
LINE
P1 RX
LINE
P0 TX
LINE
P0 RX
LINE
MONITOR P1
P2 TX
P2 RX
P1 TX
P1 RX
P0 TX
P0 RX
MONITOR P0
From the Main FP,

Monitor ports
PPT 2119 001 AA2
5.2S2
For the size of the panel, see the table Dimensions of fanout and sparing
panels (page 313).
The NTFP99AA can be used as a patch panel without sparing (like a
one-for-one fanout panel) for one DS3 card provided the signaling and
control port cables are connected to the respective Main ports on the sparing
panel.
Multiport aggregate device for a 32-port E1 TDM

The 32-port E1 TDM FP uses a multiport aggregate device to break out the
ports of the FP. Each multiport aggregate device provides individual access
for 16 E1 ports. To break out all of the ports of a 32-port E1 TDM FP, you
need two multiport aggregate devices.
The PECs of the multi-port aggregate devices are
NT0486 for the balanced
NT0421 for the unbalanced
The multiport aggregate device mounts in a Passport or seismic cabinet, or a

standard 19 inch rack. See the figure Balanced multiport aggregate device
(page 309) or Unbalanced multiport aggregate device (page 310).
To add a multiport aggregate device to a NEBS 2000 frame, you also need
adapter bracket kit NTHW14.
For more information about the multiport aggregate device, see
Multiport aggregate device connections and cabling (page 310)
Multiport aggregate device power and grounding requirements

(page 311)
Multiport aggregate device LEDs (page 311)
Multiport aggregate device alarms (page 312)
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 84
Balanced multiport aggregate device
E1 ports
Front view
LINK
A B
PWR
SYSTEM
SYNC
OK
FLT
A
LOSS
RST
B
AIS
TST
ACT
0.6 T 25OV
100-230VAC
Rear view
SIG
TX
RX
Coax cable
connectors
OK
Alarm/mgmt
connectors
(not supported)
Power supply
switches
PPT 2841 002 AB
5.2S2

Figure 85
Unbalanced multiport aggregate device
E1 ports
Front view
LINK
A B
PWR
SYSTEM
SYNC
OK
FLT
A
LOSS
RST
B
AIS
TST
ACT
0.6 T 25OV
100-230VAC
Rear view
SIG
TX
RX
OK
Alarm/mgmt
connectors
(not supported)
Coax cable
connectors
Power supply
switches
PPT 2990 001 AB
Multiport aggregate device connections and cabling

The multiport aggregate device provides coaxial (unbalanced) connections
between the device and the FP or termination panel and RJ45 (120 ohm)
connections or coaxial connections for each of the E1 ports. See the table E1
RJ45 connector pinouts (page 311).
The maximum cable length for E1 lines to customer equipment is 183 m
(600 ft). The E1 balanced and unbalanced interface connections comply with
ITU-T Recommendation G.703.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Table 84
E1 RJ45 connector pinouts
Pin number
Signal name
Receive (tip)
Receive (ring)
Frame ground
Transmit (ring)
Transmit (tip)
Frame ground
not connected
not connected
Multiport aggregate device power and grounding

requirements
The multiport aggregate device contains two dc power supplies. When both
power supplies are operational, they share power consumption for the device.
If one of the power supplies fails, the remaining power supply provides power
for the device.
The dc power source must be within the range of -36 to -72 V dc. Maximum
power consumption is 20 Watts. The dc power feeds into the system must be
protected with an external circuit breaker or fuse, with appropriate voltage
ratings and regulatory approvals. The disconnect device must be external to
the cabinet or rack and reside in the same room.
You must supply your own power cables. Power cables must be properly
grounded.
Multiport aggregate device LEDs

The SYNC LOSS LED for link A indicates a loss of frame (LOF) or loss of
signal (LOS) condition on the link between the device and the FP. The SIG
LED on the rear of the device is lit when the device is receiving a signal from
the FP. You can use the SIG LED for link A in conjunction with the SYNC
5.2S2
LOSS LED to distinguish between LOS and LOF. The AIS LED for link A
indicates that alarm indication signal is being received from the Passport
switch.
A pair of LEDs for each E1 port indicate loss of signal (LOS) and alarm
indication signal (AIS) conditions.
Multiport aggregate device alarms

If a power supply for the multiport aggregate device fails, it reports the
condition to Passport and Passport raises an alarm. E1 alarms from customer
equipment are reported to the Passport switch through the E1 signal. E1 alarm
conditions include AIS, LOF, and remote alarm indication (RAI) conditions.
In the event of an E1 LOS condition, the Passport switch sets LOF, RAI, and
AIS alarm conditions on the affected ports. There is no distinction between
LOS and LOF.
If the link between the FP and the multiport aggregate device fails, Passport
raises alarms on the affected 16 E1 ports.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Dimensions of the termination panels

The table Dimensions of fanout and sparing panels (page 313) includes the
specifications for all available fanout and sparing panels, sorted by product
engineering code (PEC). When a panel that is less than 21 inches wide (W) is
to be installed in the NEBS 2000 frame, each panel requires adapter brackets
from the kit NTHW14. The installation procedure of each termination panel
addresses how to install the brackets in 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000
Table 85
Dimensions of fanout and sparing panels
PEC of
panel
Description of termination Outside dimensions

panel
(height x width x depth)
NT0421 or
NT0486
multiport aggregate device
4.4 H x 43.2 W x 26.8 D cm

1.7 H x 17.0 W x 10.5 D inches
(1 unit high)
NTFP99AA 3-port DS3, E3, or E1

one-for-one sparing panel
8.8 H x 48.26 W x 3.0 D cm

3.5 H x 19.0 W x 1.18 D inches
NTHR79
4-port DS3 one-for-one

sparing panel
8.89 H x 48.26 W x 1.9 D cm

3.5 H x 19.0 W x 0.75 D inches
(2 units high)
NTHW52
a 12-port DS3 or E3 fanout

panel
4.44 H x 53.34 W x 1.9 D cm

1.75 H x 21.0 W x 0.75 D inches
NTQS31
a 12-port DS3 or E3
one-for-six fanout sparing
panel (comprised of
NTHR37, NTHR39,
NTHR42, and NTHR43)
44.45 H x 53.34 W x 10.92 cm

17.5 H x 21.0 W x 4.3 D inches
Note: there are also holes for
mounting it in a Passport 7400
19-inch cabinet.
5.2S2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
315
Chapter 6
Cables and cable management
The types of cables used on a Passport 15000 or 20000 system are divided in
this document into
power cables for operating the system
telecom signaling cables for connecting the node to other telecom

equipment
Although the power cables and telecom cables can share cable management
hardware and methods of use, the planning, installation, and replacement of
either type of cable is handled separately.
Managing power cables

The hardware and method involved in managing power cables is included
with the planning information for preparing a site to accommodate the switch
hardware. For power cable specifications, requirements, and limitations, refer
to 241-1501-205 Passport 15000, 20000 Site Requirements and Preparation
Guide.
For power cable installation, management, and replacement, refer to
and Upgrade.
Managing telecom cables

Managing telecom cables usually means installing the hardware and then
connecting cables to it. With a Passport 15000 or 20000, there is optional
hardware that facilitates easier, quicker, safer, more efficient, and more
5.2S2
316 Chapter 6 Cables and cable management
organized methods of cabling. For example, before marking the footprint of

the frame onto the floor in preparation for anchoring it, you must consider
where optional equipment is located for cabling the system.
The hardware and method involved in managing telecom cables includes:
Basic cable management brackets for low-density cabling (page 316)
Cable management brackets for high-density cabling (page 319)
Hardware to manage fiber cable slack near the switch (page 326)
Cabling a card with or without a termination panel (page 330)
Basic cable management brackets for low-density cabling

When a Passport 15000 or 20000 switch is mounted in a NEBS 2000 frame,
the basic cable management brackets are already installed on the frame. If a
shelf-based switch is shipped for installation into a mounting apparatus other
than the NEBS 2000 frame, basic cable management brackets are shipped
without being installed.
A basic cable management bracket is a plastic one with three segregated
sections. All switch hardware packages have 28 plastic cable management
brackets and two metal brackets at the upper rear of each NEBS 2000 frame.
The metal brackets (P0879577) have two fingers each and are intended for the
heavier and thicker electrical cables being routed up to a cable trough. (When
power cables are routed down through the floor, they are to be fastened to the
zig-zag bars of the frame, not the basic or optional cable management
brackets.) See the figures
Metal and plastic cable management brackets on a NEBS 2000 frame

(page 317)
A plastic cable management bracket P0937935 (page 318)
With any switch hardware package, enough cable management brackets are
provided to ensure tight and neat cable dressing for low-density cabling of
fiber and mini-coax cables. For switch configurations that have higher density
cabling, optional hardware is available. See High-density cable management
brackets (page 320).
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Chapter 6 Cables and cable management 317

Figure 86
Metal and plastic cable management brackets on a NEBS 2000 frame
BIP
CP slots
(0, 1)
Zig-zag bar
Rear cooling unit

Front cooling unit
ESD jack
Cable bracket
for FPs
CP slot
Cable
management
channel
Cable bracket
for FPs
Power cable
opening
from under frame
Kickplate
Power cable
channel
from floor
PPT 2819 019 AB
5.2S2

Figure 87
A plastic cable management bracket P0937935
Mounting ear for

fastening onto frame
uprights
Channel for
coax cables
Channel for
mini-coax
8W8 cables
Channel for
fiber cables
PPT 3087 004 AA
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Cable management brackets for high-density cabling

High-density cable management must be done on a NEBS 2000 frame when
the number of cables exceeds the capacity of the basic cable management
brackets. See the 241-1501-205 Passport 15000, 20000 Site Requirements
and Preparation Guide to determine whether you need a low, high, or very
high density cable management.
The optional cable management hardware that accommodates higher-density
cable management for one or two switches in a frame includes
paired plastic brackets as described in High-density cable management

brackets (page 320)
the extended cable management brackets as described in Very highdensity cable management brackets (page 321)
You can use sets of the optional cable management brackets for one or two
switches in a NEBS 2000 frame as follows:
a set of high-density brackets on one or both sides of the frame
a set of extended cable management brackets on one or both sides of the

frame to accommodate very high-density mini-coax or standard coax
cabling
a set of high-density brackets and a set of extended cable management on

the same side of the frame
See 241-1501-205 Passport 15000, 20000 Site Requirements and

Preparation Guide to choose which optional hardware is needed to
accommodate your cable density.
Since the location and quantities of FP types in one or two switches determine
whether the FP cables must be routed to the left or right side of the frame, and
up or down the side of the frame, see 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000
Hardware Installation, Maintenance and Upgrade, the section on choosing
card slots. Use this information to identify where optional cable management
brackets ought to be installed on the frame.
5.2S2
High-density cable management brackets

The high-density cable brackets double the capacity of the basic brackets by
pairing them back-to-back as shown in the figure High-density cable
management bracket pair (page 321). The second plastic brackets can be
added onto the frame at any time and use the original bracket mounting holes.
These brackets replace the single basic plastic brackets as shown in the figure
A plastic cable management bracket P0937935 (page 318) or replace all but
two of the older two-finger metal brackets as shown in the figure Metal and
plastic cable management brackets on a NEBS 2000 frame (page 317).
Each high-density cable management bracket (part number P0937935)
accommodates fiber or mini-coax cables, or both. The 241-1501-205
Passport 15000, 20000 Site Requirements and Preparation Guide indicates
how many cables of each kind fit through each bracket, and how to calculate
how many your switch or switches in a NEBS 2000 frame will need.
When cable densities exceed the capacity of the high-density cable
management brackets, you may need to use the optional coax brackets
described in Very high-density cable management brackets (page 321).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 88
High-density cable management bracket pair
Channels for cables

Mounting ear for
fastening onto frame
uprights
PPT 3410 002 AA
Very high-density cable management brackets

The very high-density cable management brackets are the optional extended
cable management brackets that can be mounted to one or both sides of a
frame as shown in the figure A NEBS 2000 frame with extended cable
management brackets and side panel brackets (page 322). Up to four
brackets fit on each side of a frame. The bracket installation procedure
identifies where the brackets are fastened to the frame. The brackets must be
mounted onto the frame before it is anchored to the floor unless enough
unobstructed space is kept available to add the brackets later. See
Guide to plan the frame footprint to include space for the brackets.
5.2S2

Figure 89
A NEBS 2000 frame with extended cable management brackets and side panel brackets
From
NTRU0366
NTRU0369
NTRU0368
From
NTRU0365
From
NTRU0366
From
NTRU0128
PPT 2820 050 AD
The extended cable management brackets accommodate only standard coax

or the proprietary 8W8 mini-coax cables of Nortel Networks. A bracket for
the left side of the frame (while facing the front of the switch) has part number
241-1501-200 5.2S2
NTRU0368 while the right side has NTRU0369 as shown in the figure An
extended cable management bracket for the right side of a NEBS 2000 frame
(page 323).
The 241-1501-205 Passport 15000, 20000 Site Requirements and
Preparation Guide indicates how many cables of fit onto each bracket. The
and Upgrade has the task flows to indicate when the installation procedure is
to be done, and how to efficiently bundle the cables onto the brackets. The
effect of this bundling is described in Location of specific FP cables in a
bundle (page 328).
Figure 90
An extended cable management bracket for the right side of a NEBS 2000 frame
Arm
Finger for
tie-wrap
Mounting
holes
PPT 3397 001 AA
The hardware kits that appropriately space parallel sets of extended cable
management brackets between two joined frames have these product
engineering codes (PECs):
NTRU0128 for side panel mounting brackets
5.2S2
NTRU0365 for frame spacer brackets
NTRU0366 for cable covers (front or rear panels)
To ensure that cable extension brackets fit between two Nortel Networks
frames and allow space for the addition or removal of FP cables, the minimum
distance between the frames is determined by adding optional joining
brackets. See the figure Frame-to-frame joining brackets (page 325).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 91
Frame-to-frame joining brackets
Frame-to-frame
joining brackets
Frame-to-frame
joining brackets
PPT 2820 049 AA
5.2S2
Hardware to manage fiber cable slack near the switch

Fiber cable slack can be managed near the Passport 15000 or 20000 switch
by installing one or more optional dual-drawer fiber management units in a
NEBS 2000 frame or equivalent near the switch.
The fiber management unit is manufactured by ADC. The unit includes two
latched drawers with 20 fiber trays each. See the figure A dual-drawer fiber
management unit NTHW50 (page 327). Each tray accommodates up to 2 m
(6.5 ft.) of one single-mode or multi-mode fiber cable with the appropriate
bend radius. The fiber unit has mounting ears to fit a 21-inch (53.34-cm) wide
frame or rack. Blank labels are included on each tray so that the origination
and destination can be recorded. Each drawer is labeled Fiber manager. Fiber
cables are routed in and out of the unit through the sides.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 92
A dual-drawer fiber management unit NTHW50
Sliding drawer
Mounting
ear
Sliding latch
Openings for
fiber cables
PPT 3035 001 AB
5.2S2
Location of specific FP cables in a bundle

During initial installation or when a control processor (CP) or function
processor (FP) is added to a Passport 15000 or 20000, the cable connections
are labeled as well as the bundle into which all cables of an FP are tiewrapped. Tracing a single cable for replacement is difficult unless you know
which bundle the cable is in. Have the network operator identify which FP has
the signaling problem so that you can trace the cable from end-port to endport.
When the extended cable management brackets are used on both sides of a
NEBS 2000 frame, up to 700 cables can be routed from two Passport 15000
or 20000 switches fully provisioned with 12-port FPs. When replacing a CP
or an FP cable, use the tables Position of each FP cable bundle on right-side
extended cable brackets (page 328) and Position of each FP cable bundle
on left-side extended cable brackets (page 329) to locate the labeled cable
bundle that holds the cable to be replaced.
Note: Slot 8 is omitted from the tables because it was intended to house
an OC card.
Table 86
Position of each FP cable bundle on right-side extended cable brackets
Lower shelf
Lower shelf
slot numbers slot numbers
Upper shelf
Upper shelf
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
10
10
Note: slot 1 of the shelf may contain a CP instead of an FP.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Table 87
Position of each FP cable bundle on left-side extended cable brackets
Upper shelf
Upper shelf
Lower shelf
Lower shelf
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
10
10
Note: slot 1 of the shelf may contain a CP instead of an FP.
5.2S2
Cabling a card with or without a termination panel

The information about custom-made or prefabricated cable assemblies for a
plug-in card or a termination panels is provided with the description of each
control processor (CP) or function processor (FP) card. Each description lists
the optional prefabricated cable assemblies and includes the specifications for
type of cable and connector, and includes the port pinouts of the faceplate
connections.
In general, cabling a Passport card port to a termination panel port means
doing Tx-to-Tx and Rx-to-Rx connections for the entire end-to-end
connection path. You can also determine the appropriate Tx-to-Rx
combinations depending whether the signal is exiting one unit and entering
the other provided the pattern of combinations is the same for the entire endto-end connection path. When the Tx-to-Rx combinations get criss-crossed
Specific cabling information for the plug-in CPs and FPs is included in
Control and function processors (page 141).
Specific cabling information for the fanout and sparing panels of the DS3
cards is included in Termination panels for FPs (page 291).
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Preparing OC or STM fiber distribution cables

The fiber distribution cables connect the ports on the function processors
(FPs) to a termination port. The customer must supply the fiber distribution
cables for the Passport 15000 or 20000.
The fiber cable connectors for Passport 15000 or 20000 FPs are the LC,
MT-RJ, or SC type. Choosing the type of cable and connectors for a fiber
optic FP depends on the terminations at both ends. You must provide the
cables and connectors that link the FPs to the far end. The 16-port OC-3/
STM-1 cards have either LC or MT-RJ connectors. See the figures A duplex
cable assembly with LC-to-LC connectors (page 333) and Cable assembly
with an MT-RJ fiber connector and a duplex SC connector (page 334).
Handling any system cable is described in 241-1501-240 Passport 15000,
20000 Hardware Installation, Maintenance and Upgrade.
Single-mode FPs at both ends can operate with either multimode or singlemode fiber cables. The difference in performance depends on the length of
fiber cable. Multimode FPs at both ends can operate with only multimode
cables.
The length of a fiber cable is determined from the exact path of fiber from its
port on an FP to its termination port. The path depends on
where the FP is located in the NEBS 2000 frame (the node, the shelf, and
the slot)
which way along the cable management channel on the Passport 15000
or 20000 that the cables continue their path; fiber cables can go in either
direction
whether the cabling is routed along the side of the frame (or equivalent
mounting apparatus) under the floor or through an overhead trough
whether there is an optional fiber management unit NTHW50 for slack

control
whether you use a fiber patch panel between the termination ends
what the angle of connection is at each termination port
where the far-end termination port is located
5.2S2
Determine the length of a fiber cable from an FP by measuring the exact path
from each port on the faceplate to its termination port.
Note: If using a metal tape measure, avoid contacting live power cables
or connections.
Remove any cable slack resulting from cautious cable cutting before
fastening the second connector to the cable. Otherwise, install and cable a
fiber management unit NTHW50 as described in 241-1501-240 Passport
To prepare FP distribution cables, do the procedure Preparing OC or STM
fiber distribution cables (page 331).
LC fiber cables and connectors

The small form LC transceiver on the faceplate of a 16-port OC-3/STM-1 FP
accommodates simplex or duplex single-mode fiber connectors. For an
example of a cable assembly, see the figure A duplex cable assembly with
LC-to-LC connectors (page 333).
Handling fiber cables is described in 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000
Some FPs have small form pluggable (SFP) optical modules that plug into the
FP faceplate, and interface the LC cable connectors. For information about
SFPs, see SFP optical module.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 93
A duplex cable assembly with LC-to-LC connectors
11.6 cm (4.6 in.)
Dust
cap
Strain
relief
Colour-coded
shrink wrap
3.2 mm
(0.1259 in.)
Duplex fiber
optic cable
Duplex LC
connector
1.6 cm
(0.63 in.)
1.0 cm
(0.394 in.)
Label positioned
outside of
closed hood
Keyway guide
Duplex clip
(various shapes)
Ferrule
Tab to engage
connector
PPT 3175 001 AB6
MT-RJ fiber cables and connectors

The MT-RJ connector accommodates two fibers. One fiber carries the
transmit signal and the other fiber carries the receive signal. The cable is a
3-mm (1/8-inch) jacketed fiber-optic cable with two strands of single-mode
fiber in it. See the figure Cable assembly with an MT-RJ fiber connector and
a duplex SC connector (page 334). Ensure that the manufacturer of the cable
identifies which SC connector is to transmit and which is to receive.
Handling fiber cables is described in 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000
5.2S2

Figure 94
Cable assembly with an MT-RJ fiber connector and a duplex SC connector
Customer specified length

Strain relief boot
SC connector, 2 places
Receive
Singlemode fiber
Strain relief
boot, 2 places
Heatshrink
Transmit
Female MT-RJ
connector
Singlemode fiber,
2 places
PPT 2924 001 AA
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Preparing coax distribution cables

Cards requiring coax connections at the faceplate of FPs or a termination
panel can be provided by Nortel Networks in prefabricated cable assemblies
or must be provided by you. To custom make your own cables for a specific
type of FP, refer to the cable assembly specifications in Control and function
processors (page 141). Use the specifications to make your cables. If the FP
description does not list cable assembly parts, you must use the appropriate
prefabricated cable assemblies.
The specialized mini-coax distribution cables for the 4-port DS3 and 12-port
DS3 or E3 cards are available from Nortel Networks in prefabricated
assemblies. These cables have special 8W8 connectors at the FP end to
accommodate dense cabling at the faceplate of the cards. The other end of the
FP cable can be standard coax or mini-coax 8W8.
The PEC of all available FP distribution cables is in the tables
Prefabricated FP control port cables for connecting to a sparing panel

(page 335)
Prefabricated 75-ohm cables for connecting FPs to a sparing panel

(page 336)
Prefabricated DS3 or E3 cables connecting FPs to an NTHW52

(page 336)
Note: There is no control cable between an FP and an NTHW52.
Table 88
Prefabricated FP control port cables for connecting to a sparing panel
PEC
Description
Length
NTHR69
2.5 m (8.2 ft)
NTHR70
5.0 m (16.4 ft)
NTHR71
15 m (49.2 ft)
5.2S2

Table 89
Prefabricated 75-ohm cables for connecting FPs to a sparing panel
PEC
Description
Length
NTFP19AD male straight BNC to male straight BNC
3.0 m (9.8 ft)
NTFP19AE
straight male BNC to straight male BNC
15 m (49 ft)
NTHR58
male 8W8 mini-coax to male BNC
2.5 m (8.2 ft)
NTHR59
5.0 m (16.4 ft)
NTHR60
15 m (49.2 ft)
NTHR69
DS3 or E3 male D-sub to male D-sub
2.5 m (8.2 ft)
NTHR70
5.0 m (16.4 ft)
NTHR71
15 m (49.2 ft)
NTHR72
male 8W8-to-8W8 mini-coax
2.5 m (8.2 ft)
NTHR73
5.0 m (16.4 ft)
NTHR74
15 m (49.2 ft)
For the mapping of 8W8 connector pins to the BNC connectors for software
port numbering, see Assigning sparing panel connections for a 12-port DS3
or E3 FP (page 192).
Table 90
Prefabricated DS3 or E3 cables connecting FPs to an NTHW52
PEC
Description
Length
NTFP19AD straight male BNC to straight male BNC
2.5 m (8.2 ft)
NTFP19AE straight male BNC to straight male BNC
15 m (49.2 ft)
NTHR58
2.5 m (8.2 ft)
NTHR59
5.0 m (16.4 ft)
NTHR60
15 m (49.2 ft)
For the mapping of 8W8 connector pins to the BNC connectors for software
port numbering, see Assigning the fanout panel cable connections
(page 298).
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Note: When the FPs have more than four ports each or the total number
of FP connections per shelf is 64 or more, the optional extended cable
management brackets must be installed.
The cable assembly NTHR58 has the same connector pattern and labels when
connected to any of the three ports on a 12-port DS3 or E3 faceplate. The
position of the cable at P0, P1, or P2 determines the port mapping between
the 8W8 connections at the faceplate and the BNC connectors at a sparing
panel or fanout panel at the other end. Use the figure Labels of mini-coax and
BNC cable connections on an NTHR58 cable assembly (page 338) to label
the cables at the FP end and at the BNC end.
5.2S2

Figure 95
Labels of mini-coax and BNC cable connections on an NTHR58 cable assembly
RX4
To P0, P1, or P2
TX4
RX3
Heat
shrink
Tie-wrap
TX3
RX2
NTHR58
label
Mini-coax
cable cluster
TX2
RX1
Pin A8
Orientation
space
Pin A1
TX1
Cable
label
Heat
shrink
PPT 2950 001 AA2
Preparing control port cables

For the hardware configurations involving sparing panels, the control port
cables are available from Nortel Networks in prefabricated assemblies. Refer
to the table Prefabricated FP control port cables for connecting to a sparing
panel (page 335).
241-1501-200 5.2S2
You can custom make your own control port cable using the specifications
described in the section on cable assemblies for each type of FP in Control
and function processors (page 141). The control port pinout is the same for
all DS3 or E3 cards.
5.2S2
Handling alarm cables

A Passport 15000 or 20000 switch has internal alarm cables installed at the
time of shipping, and can have had external alarms added for the site. Internal
alarm cables connect the breaker interface panel (BIP) in a NEBS 2000 frame
to the switch, while external alarm cables connect the BIP to site alarms such
as a LED or end-of-aisle lamp. The internal alarm cables for a second switch
are typically included even if it was not installed.
Cables are mounted in exclusive bundles on different paths against the frame
of the Passport 15000 or 20000. The current from power cables can interfere
with the transmission of signals over coax, therefore the power and alarm
cables follow different paths.
There is no bend radius for electrical cable, however, observe a 4-cm
(1.5-inch) bend radius for 1/0 AWG cable. Any cable connected to the BIP
must be flexible enough to do right-angle bends with cracking its sheath.
When routing the alarm cables, keep them away from the battery return
(positive) and battery (negative) cable pairs. Otherwise, the cables can behave
like antennas that transmit electromagnetic interference (EMI).
Prefabricated DS3 or E3 cable assemblies

The mini-coax cables for the 4-port DS3, 12-port DS3, or 12-port E3 have
special 8W8 connectors at the FP end to accommodate dense cabling at the
faceplate of the cards. The other end of the FP cable can be standard coax or
mini-coax 8W8. The cables that connect FPs to various termination panels are
available from Nortel Networks.
The PEC of each cable is in the tables
Prefabricated FP cable assemblies to a fanout panel NTHW52

(page 341)
Prefabricated FP cable assemblies to a one-for-six sparing panel

NTHR37 (page 341)
Prefabricated FP cable assemblies to the control ports on an NTHR37

(page 341)
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Table 91
Prefabricated FP cable assemblies to a fanout panel NTHW52
PEC
Description
Length
NTHR58
DS3 or E3 mini-coax 8W8 to BNC cable
2.5 m (8.2 feet)
NTHR59
5.0 m (16.4 feet)
NTHR60
15 m (49.2 feet)
Table 92
Prefabricated FP cable assemblies to a one-for-six sparing panel
NTHR37
PEC
Description
Length
NTHR72
DS3 or E3 mini-coax 8W8 to 8W8 cable
2.5 m (8.2 feet)
NTHR73
5.0 m (16.4 feet)
NTHR74
15 m (49.2 feet)
Table 93
Prefabricated FP cable assemblies to the control ports on an NTHR37
PEC
Description
Length
NTHR69
DS3 or E3 D-sub to D-sub cable
2.5 m (8.2 feet)
NTHR70
5.0 m (16.4 feet)
NTHR71
15 m (49.2 feet)
Check your site records to identify which BNC connectors map to CPE at the
fanout or sparing panel. The cable assemblies that are identified by PECs
NTHR58, NTHR59, and NTHR60 have numbered labels distinguishing each
BNC connector from 1 to 8. The ports of the mini-coax connectors at the other
end of each cable assembly are not visibly numbered, however, the pattern of
pin numbering is the same for all mini-coax connectors. The mini-coax pin at
the end of the D-sub nearest the exiting cluster of mini-coax cables is
5.2S2
numbered 1, while the pin furthest from the cluster is numbered 8. See the
figure Pinouts of mini-coax and BNC cable connections of an NTHR58
(page 342).
Figure 96
Pinouts of mini-coax and BNC cable connections of an NTHR58
RX4
To P0, P1, or P2
TX4
RX3
Heat
shrink
Tie-wrap
TX3
RX2
NTHR58
label
Mini-coax
cable cluster
TX2
RX1
Pin A8
Orientation
space
Pin A1
TX1
Cable
label
Heat
shrink
PPT 2950 001 AA2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
343
Chapter 7
Using status indicator LEDs and sounds
The status of hardware equipment on a Passport 15000 or 20000 switch is
indicated by a system of colored and shaped LEDs. A lit LED indicates one
status in one color. On the same type of part or assembly, the LED is always
in the same position relative to its mates. While the equipment is powered,
there is always one LED that is lit.
The status of most of the hardware equipment on a Passport 15000 or
Passport 20000 can also be checked in software. The 241-5701-520 Passport
7400, 15000, 20000 Troubleshooting and Testing describes the procedures for
verifying hardware status.
The number of LEDs for hardware status varies between parts. For the
descriptions and locations of the LEDs, see the appropriate section:
Follow-me LEDs (page 344)
Status LEDs of a BIP alarm module (page 346)
Status LEDs of a BIM (page 349)
Status LEDs of a PIM (page 350)
Status LEDs of a fabric (page 352)
Status LEDs of a CP or an FP card (page 356)
Status LEDs of a cooling unit fan (page 362)
Status LEDs of a sparing panel (page 365)
Turning off the audible alarm (page 366)
5.2S2
344 Chapter 7 Using status indicator LEDs and sounds
Follow-me LEDs
For the status of any equipment to be indicated, the equipment must be
powered. No lit LED means no power. Once the equipment is powered, one
LED is always lit. The likelihood of both LEDs failing at the same time due
to natural aging (as opposed to an impact) is greater than 99.999%.
The status colors of lit LEDs are:
green rectangle, indicating normal operation
amber triangle, indicating a major or minor problem
red circle, indicating the part is out of service but powered, or an

intermediate startup stage from being installed due to an initial
installation, a maintenance replacement, or an upgrade
To determine what to do when a lit LED is other than green, see:
What to do when a lit red LED is detected (page 344)
What to do when a lit amber LED is detected (page 345)
Hierarchy of LEDs and sounds (page 345)
The procedures in the 241-5701-520 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000

Troubleshooting and Testing can help with determining why a LED may not
be green.
What to do when a lit red LED is detected

When a lit red LED is detected on a card, the card is powered but out of
service. For a card that was previously operating normally, determine if it is
the only available one in the Passport 15000 or 20000 or if it has an available
spare to maintain operation.
If it is the only card (no spare), service is down. Replace it immediately.
If it is spared, the active card has no backup. Replace it soon.
See the appropriate replacement procedure for the type of card.
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Chapter 7 Using status indicator LEDs and sounds 345
What to do when a lit amber LED is detected

When a lit amber LED is detected on a card, there is no traffic running on it.
After powering up a card, amber indicates a startup mode. Wait for the LED
on the card to change from amber to green or red. For a card that was
previously operating normally (the LED was solid green), amber indicates the
card has received new software. Either the software is invalid for that card, or
the card is must be replaced with a compatible type or version of card.
See the appropriate replacement procedure for the type of card.
Hierarchy of LEDs and sounds

A lit red LED or an audible alarm always indicates a critical problem. A part
with a lit red LED must always be addressed before a part with a lit amber
LED. When more than one critical problem occurs, some parts must be
addressed before others so that the impact of out-of-service parts is
minimized and further problems are prevented. The sequence of fixing
depends on:
how the ambient temperature of the room affects the capability of the
remaining fans to keep the switch nominally cool
whether the switch has an in-service redundant spare to back up the failed
part (for example, a fabric, a CP, an FP, a PIM, a BIM)
whether the replacement part is readily available for the switch
For example, in a hypothetical scenario with a Passport 15000 or 20000 that

is redundantly configured when there is a relatively simultaneous failure of a
load-sharing fabric, the active CP, an unspared FP, and a fan fail in a room at
35 degrees Celsius (95 Fahrenheit), the sequence of repair is:
1
the fan, because determining whether the failure is the fan or its
controller and replace it is the longest maintenance task; meanwhile the
ambient temperature inside the switch will rise towards the point when
another part can fail or have service degradation
the fabric, because although its failure triggered an automatic takeover of

its load by the mate fabric thereby maintaining service, losing a fabric
while there is no backup effectively causes the entire switch to be out of
service
5.2S2
the CP, because although its failure triggered an automatic switchover of

the spare CP to become active and all other FP traffic continues to be
processed on that cage, losing a CP while there is no backup causes
serious service degradation but the switch continues to handle existing
traffic
the FP, because reduced capacity is less important than maintaining the
backups that impact greater portions of the switch or its service
performance
Status LEDs of a BIP alarm module

The BIP alarm module has LEDs on its faceplate to indicate the status of the
one or both Passport 15000 or 20000 switches, which includes:
a red and a green for itself
pairs of minor, major, and critical LEDs, one set above the other (under
the LED Test button), indicating the severity of the problem for either the
upper or the lower switch
ten LEDs (under the ACO button) acting as one large follow-me indicator
See the figure Location of the alarm module status LEDs (page 348). To
clearly observe which LEDs are lit and their color, you must stand directly in
front of the faceplate. Unlike the other parts of a switch that have one LED
per color, each LED of the alarm module cluster shows one of the three status
colors. The colors are green, amber, and red.
In a startup mode after installation and powering up, the LEDs cycle from
solid red to solid green.
When the BIP is powered from an MFA150 system of ac rectifiers and at least
one of the rectifiers fails or is switched off, the test LEDs indicate amber if at
least one CP is connected.
After normal operation when a lit LED is not green, do What to do when a
lit red LED is detected (page 344) or What to do when a lit amber LED is
detected (page 345).
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Testing the LEDs

Testing the operation of LEDs of a Passport 15000 or 20000 has no effect on
switch performance. During the test, the LEDs remain lit amber together for
about 10 seconds. If none of the LEDs is lit, no CPs are installed.
If a LED does not light, then one or more of the following conditions is
occurring:
the green LED is burned out and software can verify if the part is actually
operational
there is a problem in a cable assembly or a connection between the BIP

and the PIMs
there is a problem with one of the power feeds to the BIP, but this means
a series of hardware LEDs would not be lit
there is a problem in the backplane of the shelf
When the BIP is the power distribution unit for a Passport 15000, pressing the
LED test button verifies the operation of the LEDs on the alarm module.
When the BIP is the power distribution unit for a Passport 20000, pressing the
LED test button verifies the operation of the LEDs of other hardware parts by
lighting all of them on:
the BIMs and alarm module of the BIP
the cooling unit or units
the fabrics in one or both switches
The PIM LEDs are indicators of power on or off and are not included in the
LED tests.
5.2S2

Figure 97
Location of the alarm module status LEDs
Alarm module status LEDs

LED test button
ACO button
Status LEDs
PPT 2819 015 AA
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Status LEDs of a BIM

Each breaker interface module (BIM) has two LEDs on its faceplate to
indicate the status of power going to a Passport 15000 or 20000. See the
figure Location of BIM status LEDs (page 349). The colors of BIM status
are green (rectangle) or red (triangle).
solid red to solid green.
After normal operation when a lit LED is not green, do What to do when a
lit red LED is detected (page 344).
Figure 98
Location of BIM status LEDs
BIM status LEDs
PPT 2819 022 AA
5.2S2
Status LEDs of a PIM

Each power interface module (PIM) of a Passport 20000 has two LEDs on its
faceplate to indicate the status of power going to it from the BIP. See the
figure Location of PIM status LEDs for feeds A and B (page 351). Each
PIM receives power from either an A or B feed, depending where it is plugged
into the shelf assembly. The LED labelled A indicates the incoming power
from power feed A through the BIP, while B indicates it for power feed B. See
the table Power LED status indicators for each PIM (page 350).
Table 94
Power LED status indicators for each PIM
LED color Mode
Meaning
green
power is on for the slots powered by the PIM
off
solid
power is off because of one or more of the following:

the breaker on the BIM that distributes power to it is
off (O is pressed in)
the cable from the BIP to the PIM is disconnected at
one or both ends
the power input to the BIP is off or missing for the
indicated A or B feed
the BIM is missing or defective
the LED is burned out
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 99
Location of PIM status LEDs for feeds A and B
PPT 3065 002 AA
5.2S2
Status LEDs of a fabric

Each fabric card at the rear of a switch has LEDs to indicate the status of
operation. There are two LEDs on each fabric, a red and a green. Only one
LED is lit to indicate the status of the fabric when the switch hardware is
powered up.
Fabric LEDs are described in:
Status LEDs of a fabric in a Passport 15000 (page 352)
Status LEDs of a fabric in a Passport 20000 (page 354)
Status LEDs of a fabric in a Passport 15000

For normal operation, the circular LED is solid green. See the figure
Location of fabric status LEDs in a Passport 15000 (page 353).
solid red to solid green. (There is no amber status.) Both LEDs must be solid
green for normal operation to occur.
When a fabric is disabled by the system because of faults, the LED turns red.
A red LED can be caused by more than disabling, which means a fabric with
a red LED can still be transmitting data. Similarly, a fabric with a green LED
might be prevented from transmitting data.
When a fabric is locked by force in software, it shows solid green (unlike a
CP or an FP).
After normal operation when the LED is not green, do What to do when a lit
red LED is detected (page 344).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 100
Location of fabric status LEDs in a Passport 15000
ESD jack
Rear (lower)
cooling unit
Fabric cover
Fabric status
LEDs
Fabric lever
Insertion
alignment
arrows
Access panel
to diagnostic
connector
(For Nortel
Networks
personnel)
Fabric cover
Fabric status
LEDs
Fabric lever
Access panel
to diagnostic
connector
Captive
screws
ESD jack
Air filter cover
PPT 2819 014 AC
5.2S2
Status LEDs of a fabric in a Passport 20000

For normal operation, the rectangular LED is solid green. See the figure
Location of fabric status LEDs in a Passport 20000 (page 355).
solid red to solid green even if the firmware has not yet been loaded.
When the LED is red, the fabric status is one of the following:
on the fabric the captive screw of the lever has not been fastened, which
depresses a switch to reset the fabric
has failed and has automatically been disabled by the system
has partially failed (may be green instead)
is unseated
is being reset
is being initialized
When the LED is green, the fabric status is one of the following:
is locked by force in software (unlike a CP or an FP)
has failed partially and cannot transmit data
After normal operation when the LED is not green, do What to do when a lit
red LED is detected (page 344) or What to do when a lit amber LED is
detected (page 345).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 101
Location of fabric status LEDs in a Passport 20000
ESD jack
Rear (lower)
cooling unit
Fabric status
LEDs
Fabric cover
Fabric handle
Fabric handle
MAC address
module
Alarm/BITS
module
Fabric status
LEDs
Captive screw
of fabric lever
Fabric lever
ESD jack
Captive screw
Air filter cover
PPT 3087 009 AB
5.2S2
Status LEDs of a CP or an FP card

The control processors (CPs) and function processors (FPs) at the front of the
Passport 15000 or 20000 have a column of three LEDs each. The sequence
from top to bottom is red (circle), amber (triangle), and green (rectangle). See
the figure Location of the common CP or FP card status LEDs (page 357).
The CPs and some FPs also have other status LEDs for card-specific
functionality.
When a CP or an FP is locked by force in software, the LED shows solid red.
After normal operation of a CP or an FP when a lit LED is not green, do
What to do when a lit red LED is detected (page 344) or What to do when
a lit amber LED is detected (page 345).
More card-specific information is provided in:
Status LEDs of a CP (page 357)
Status LEDs of an FP (page 358)
Status LEDs of the Ethernet ports on an NTHW49 (page 359)
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 102
Location of the common CP or FP card status LEDs
Common card
status LEDs
FP or CP
PPT 2819 016 AA2
Status LEDs of a CP
For a CP in a startup mode after installation, the common LEDs light in
sequence from:
1
solid red, indicating powering up or after power-up, or is being reset or

restarted; during solid red, the hardware and fabric backplane is tested
and initialized; if there is a problem, the CP reboots and remains solid red
flashing red, indicating that initializing and testing the fabric backplane
has passed and the CP software is loading
5.2S2
fast flashing red, indicating software is downloading
solid amber, indicating the software is not yet loaded or configured for
that CP
slow flashing green, indicating the software has been loaded and the
applications are being initialized
fast flashing green, indicating the hardware and software is on standby as

the redundant (back-up or inactive) CP, or the module is ready to be put
into service by the software
solid green, indicating power is on, software is loaded, the CP is in

service operating normally, and is the active CP
Note: While both CPs are amber, then the FPs cannot reach solid green.
A spare CP in startup mode after being configured in software and after the
main CP has already been installed shows a flashing green indication.
A CP3 card has two LEDs on each 100Base-T port. The LEDs are integrated
into the RJ-45 jack. Behaviour of these LEDs is as follows:
solid green link LED: link is present
flashing green link LED: either Tx or Rx activity is detected
off yellow Collision LED: no collision has been detected
flashing yellow Collision LED: a collision has been detected
Status LEDs of an FP
For an FP in a startup mode after installation, powering up, and software
configuration, and after at least one CP is installed, the common LEDs
progress in relative sequence. The sequence is not fixed because the status of
an individual card or the rate of self-test differs between card types. The
relative sequence of LEDs is from:
1
solid green, confirming initial power up
solid red, indicating a reset or restart to test hardware; if there is a

problem, the FP reboots; if the FP stays solid red after 30 seconds, it is
faulty
241-1501-200 5.2S2
slow flashing red, indicating the software is initializing for a reset or is

loading firmware which causes a reset to run the self-test again (solid red)
fast flashing red, indicating software is downloading
solid amber, indicating the card is not faulty but cannot operate because
the slot is configured for a card type other than the type of the inserted
card
slow flashing green, indicating the software has been loaded, and the FP
is being initialized
fast flashing green, indicating the hardware and software is on standby

(an inactive spare) or the FP is ready to be put into service by the software
solid green, indicating power is on, software is loaded, and the card is
active, in service, and operating normally; some FPs show a solid green
LED while software loading is still completing (for example, a VSP3)
but the overlap is very brief
Note: If the FP has not yet been configured in the software, the LED
cycle is solid green to solid red, then alternating between flashing red and
flashing green.
While operational, an electrical FP indicates it is active by showing a solid

green LED. Its standby mate shows a fast flashing green LED.
While operational, an optical FP indicates it is active by showing a solid green
LED. An optical FP does not have a true standby mate. When dual-FPs are
configured for AnnexB, LAPS, or Y-protection, both cards show solid green
LEDs regardless if all active ports that are providing service (as opposed to
being on hot standby) are on only one card.
When an FP is undergoing software migration, that is, a change of software,
the LED shows fast-flashing green.
Status LEDs of the Ethernet ports on an NTHW49

The 4-port Gigabit Ethernet function processor (FP), also known as the 4pGe
or NTHW49, has transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) LEDs to the left of each of
its four optical module sockets (ports in software). See the figure The
Ethernet port status LEDs of an NTHW49 (page 361).
5.2S2
Provided the card slot has been configured (provisioned) correctly for the
NTHW49, and the card is installed with the correct small form-factor
pluggable (SFP) optical transceiver modules, the typical behavior of the port
status LEDs is as follows.
Both LEDs are unlit when the card is initially powered up.
Both LEDs light solid green when the port software is initialized and all
alarms related to the port and its SFP modules have cleared.
When traffic passes through the transmit portion of the port, its LED
flashes green. When traffic passes through the receive portion of the port,
its LED flashes green. The Tx LASER is on and the Rx fiber is lit.
Both LEDs are lit during an Ethernet port test, and are unlit after the test
until the port is unlocked. When the port test includes Tx or Rx traffic,
the respective LEDs flash.
When one LED is lit and the other is not, the LED itself has failed. Traffic
will continue to flow through that portion of the port.
When the card is powered, both LEDs are unlit when:
the port is locked
an alarm has been generated against the port, for example, SFP alarm
7011 5480, loss of signal (LOS), a hardware failure, or an autonegotiation alarm
the card or port is not correctly configured in software
To determine the operational status of the Ethernet port, especially if a LED

is unlit, use the procedure 241-5701-600 Passport 7400, 15000, 20000
Configuration Guide to display the status of an installed SFP module.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Figure 103
The Ethernet port status LEDs of an NTHW49
Port label
LED
Where optical
module plugs in
(optical module socket)
PPT 3301 001 AA
5.2S2
Status LEDs of a cooling unit fan

The status LEDs for each fan of both the front and rear cooling units is shown
at the front of the frame so that the status of the rear (lower) fans can be
determined without going to the rear of the frame. The rear cooling units
LEDs are duplicated at the front and back of the Passport 15000 or 20000.
The LEDs are labeled with G and R to distinguish between green and red.
For a cooling unit in a startup mode after installation and powering up, the
LEDs cycle in sequence from solid red to solid green.
After normal operation when a lit LED is not green, assess the impact of the
ambient room temperature on a Passport 15000 or 20000 being cooled by two
fans and do What to do when a lit red LED is detected (page 344).
When the LED beside a fan is off after the fan or its controller has been
replaced, verify the in-line 4 A fast-acting fuse between the controller and its
input power has not blown. If so, replace the controller because the fuse is
soldered in.
When a fan fail occurs, major software alarm 7012 0051 is generated and both
the major and minor hardware alarm lights are lit. For information on
hardware alarms, see Hardware alarm definitions (page 66).
Upon the first fan failure:
the fan trouble indicator light goes from green to red
the frame-level alarm indicator displays a minor and a major alarm
a major software alarm is raised at the network management console
single fan failures should be attended to immediately or, alternately,

within 48 hours
Upon the second and third fan failures:
the fan trouble indicator light goes from green to red
the frame-level alarm indicator continues to display a minor and a major

alarm unless something else has changed
241-1501-200 5.2S2
double or triple fan failures must be attended to immediately before one

or both fabrics automatically shut down
additional software alarms are raised if the shelf temperature rises above
the shut down temperature
5.2S2

Figure 104
Location of fan controller status LEDs
Upper (front) cooling unit
LOWER

ESD jacks
Status LEDs
Alarm
Power connector B, upper cooling unit

Power connector A, upper cooling unit
Temperature sensor
Status LEDs
UPPER
A
B
Lower (rear) cooling unit

D-sub connector for alarm cable
Power connector B, lower cooling unit
Power connector A, lower cooling unit
PPT 2820 051 AB
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Status LEDs of a sparing panel

Each sparing panel has a column of 7 LEDs, one for each DS3 or E3 FP card.
See the figure Location of status LEDs for sparing panel NTQS31
(page 366).
Each LED is a tri-colored LED to indicate the sparing status of the FP. See the
table LED statuses of a DS3 or E3 sparing panel (page 365).
Table 95
LED statuses of a DS3 or E3 sparing panel
LED
color
Normal FP
Spare FP
off
the associated FP is not the associated FP is not detected

detected
red
the FP is connected but the FP is connected but communication is

communication is not
not established
established
amber
the spare FP is carrying the spare FP is not in use or traffic from

traffic for this FP
the FP is looped back (normal operation)
green
the FP is carrying traffic the spare FP is carrying traffic for one of

(normal operation)
the main FPs
In a startup mode after installation and powering up, the LED for each cabled
FP cycles from solid red to solid green. If the software configuration is not
completed for each FP connection on the sparing panel, the LEDs remain red.
5.2S2

Figure 105
Location of status LEDs for sparing panel NTQS31
Connections
from switch
Status
LEDs
Monitor port
selecting
buttons
Cover
Display indicating
selected monitor
ports
D-sub
connector
Mini-coax
connector
Screw
PPT 2819 025 AA
Turning off the audible alarm

Turn off an audible alarm by pressing the ACO button on the alarm module.
See the figure Location of the alarm module status LEDs (page 348).
241-1501-200 5.2S2
367
Chapter 8
Field replaceable units
Passport 15000 or 20000 has hardware parts that are field replaceable units
(FRUs). The FRUs are uniquely identified by either a product engineering
code (PEC) or a part number. Part numbers from a non-Nortel Networks
manufacturer are indicated.
Service replaceable units (SRUs) are included in the lists as FRUs.
The PECs or part numbers that are shared by Passport 15000 or 20000 or are
unique to either Passport are listed together in tables under the same
replacement groups. Since this chapter assumes you are replacing a part with
the same kind of part, and each part has a unique identification number, parts
for either a Passport 15000 or 20000 are listed together. An individual part
that is unique to a Passport 15000 or 20000 is identified.
Note: Procedures throughout this document referred to part numbers of
hardware that can only be ordered through a parts kit. If the part number
or the name of a part is not listed in this chapter, and you need to replace
it, contact your Nortel Networks sales representative to identify the kit
that contains the replacement part.
Any backplane cannot be changed in the field because of the difficulty to
change it or the downtime to key portions or the whole system. To replace a
backplane, for example, because of bent pins, the hardware assembly they are
part of must be replaced. Hardware assemblies with backplanes include the
BIP, cooling unit, fabric, or shelf.
5.2S2
368 Chapter 8 Field replaceable units
The FRUs are grouped into these sections:
FRUs that plug into or get screwed onto a Passport 15000 or 20000
(page 368)
FRUs for an MFA150 system of ac rectifiers (page 385)
FRUs that plug into or get screwed onto a Passport 15000

or 20000
The field replaceable units (FRUs) that plug into the BIP, shelf assembly, or
the cooling unit, or get screwed onto the NEBS 2000 frame are grouped in the
following tables or sections:
FP cards, SFP modules, and termination panels (page 370)
Control processor (CP) cards (page 372)
CP and FP signalling cable assemblies and mounting equipment

(page 373)
Custom-made cable assemblies (page 374)
Prefabricated cable assemblies (page 374)
Spare parts kit NTQH29AA for a Passport 20000 (page 376)
Spare parts kit NTQH29AB for a Passport 20000 (page 377)
Spare parts kit NTQH29AC for a Passport 20000 (page 377)
Spare parts kit NTQH29AD for a Passport 20000 (page 378)
Cooling unit parts for the AA versions (page 378)
Cooling unit parts for the AB versions (page 379)
BIP parts for a Passport 15000 (page 380)
BIP parts for a Passport 20000 (page 380)
Frame accessories and other filler hardware (page 381)
All other plug-in or screw-on parts for a Passport 15000 (page 383)
All other plug-in or screw-on parts for a Passport 20000 (page 383)
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Chapter 8 Field replaceable units 369
All other plug-in or screw-on parts for a Passport 15000 or 20000

(page 384)
Interface cables for interworking between an EdgeLink 100 and a

Passport 15000 or 20000 (page 384)
5.2S2
FP cards, SFP modules, and termination panels

The following function processors (FPs), small-form factor pluggable (SFP)
optical modules, and the FP termination panels include these FRUs:
NT0486, balanced DC multiport aggregate device
NT0421, unbalanced DC multiport aggregate device
NTFP99AA, 3-port one-for-one sparing panel (from Passport 7400) for

two 2-port DS3 TDM FPs or two 2-port E1 TDM FPs
NTHR17, OC3/STM-1, 4-port, multimode
NTHR21, OC3/STM-1, 4-port, single-mode intermediate reach
NTHR23, DS3, 12-port
NTHR25, E3, 12-port
NTHR29, OC-12/STM-4, 1-port, single-mode long range
NTHR31, DS3, 4-port, channelized IMA
NTHR37, sparing panel module for DS3 or E3 (see NTQS31)
NTHR39, sparing panel relay module for DS3 or E3 (see NTQS31)
NTHR42, sparing panel control module for DS3 or E3 (see NTQS31)
NTHR79, DS3, 4-port one-for-one sparing panel
NTHR83, STM-1, 1-port, channelized single-mode intermediate reach
NTHR88, DS3, 4-port, channelized frame relay
NTHR89, DS3, 4-port, channelized frame relay
NTHR91, DS3, 4-port, channelized ATM CES
NTHW01, OC-48/STM-16, 1-port single-mode intermediate reach ATM

with APS
NTHW05, OC-3/STM-1, 4-port, multimode
NTHW10, general processor with disk, 2-port
NTHW11, OC-12/STM-4, 4-port, single-mode intermediate reach ATM
NTHW15, OC-3/STM-1, 4-port, single-mode intermediate reach
NTHW18, 6-module packet server service processor
241-1501-200 5.2S2
NTHW21, OC3/STM-1, 16-port, ATM single-mode (SM) intermediate

reach (IR) with MT-RJ connectors
NTHW30, VPN extender card
NTHW31, OC3/STM-1, 16-port, ATM single-mode (SM) intermediate

reach (IR) with LC connectors
NTHW39, OC-48/STM-16, 1-port, single-mode short reach POS
NTHW44, OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM, 16-port
NTHW49, Gigabit Ethernet, 4-port
NTHW52, fanout panel for 12-port DS3 or E3
NTHW70, OC-3/STM-1Ch, 4-port, single-mode intermediate reach

TDM/CES
NTHW84, voice services processor 3 (VSP3)
NTHW86, OC-12/STM-4, 4-port, single-mode intermediate reach ATM
NTHW87, voice services processor 2 (VSP2)
NTHW91, DS3, 2-port, channelized TDM
NTHW92, E1, 32-port, TDM
NTQS31, sparing panel module for DS3 or E3 (includes NTHR37,

NTHR39, and NTHR42)
NTTP01AB SFP 1000BASE-SX reach in an NTHW49 with up to 550 m

(1,804.6 ft or 0.34 mi) with 50/125 multimode (MM) fiber cables or up
to 275 m (902.3 ft) with 62.5/125 MM fiber cables
NTTP01CB SFP 1000BASE-LX with extended reach in an NTHW49 of

up to 10 km (6.25 mi) with single-mode (SM) fiber cables
NTTP02AD SFP in an NTHW44 with multimode (MM) short reach

(SR-0) cables up to 2 km (1.25 mi)
NTTP02CD SFP in an NTHW44 with single-mode (SM) intermediate

reach (IR-1) cables up to 15 km (9.3 mi)
NTTP02ED SFP in an NTHW44 with single-mode (SM) long reach

(LR-1) cables up to 40 km (24.8 mi)
5.2S2
Control processor (CP) cards

The following CP cards field replaceable units (FRUs):
NTHR06, CP2 with DS1 BITS interface (Passport 15000)
NTHR35, CP2 with E1 BITS interface (Passport 15000)
NTHW06, CP3 with DS1 BITS interface (Passport 15000)
NTHW06CA, CP3 with DS1 BITS interface (Passport 20000)
NTHW08, CP3 with E1 BITS interface (Passport 15000 or 20000)
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Table 96
Order code
Part description
NT0479
CP Ethernet cable kit for CP2, CP2E, or CP3
NTBP25
CP cable for DCE V.24 RS232 local operator port
NTFP19AD
DS3 or E3 straight male BNC to straight male BNC cable

assembly, 3.0 m (9.8 ft)
NTFP19AE
DS3 or E3 straight male BNC to straight male BNC cable

assembly, 15 m (49 ft)
NTHW50
fiber management unit, dual drawer
NTHR58
fanout or sparing panel DS3 or E3 mini-coax 8W8 to BNC

cable assembly, 2.5 m (8.2 feet)
NTHR59

cable assembly, 5.0 m (16.4 feet)
NTHR60

cable assembly,15 m (49.2 feet)
NTHR69
sparing panel DS3 or E3 DB9 D-sub to D-sub control cable

assembly, 2.5 m (8.2 feet)
NTHR70

NTHR71

assembly, 15 m (49.2 feet)
NTHR72
sparing panel DS3 or E3 8W8 to mini-coax 8W8 cable

NTHR73

NTHR74

assembly,15 m (49.2 feet)
NTRU0368
cable management bracket, extended, left side
NTRU0369
cable management bracket, extended, right side
P0879577
cable management bracket, metal, left or right side, front or

rear uprights
(Sheet 1 of 2)
5.2S2

Order code
Part description
P0937935
cable management bracket, moulded plastic, left or right side,

front or rear uprights
P0918821
adapter bracket, left (L) front (long), for a shelf-based switch
P0918822
adapter bracket, right (R) front (long), for a shelf-based switch
P0918823
adapter bracket, left (L) rear (short), for a shelf-based switch
P0918824
adapter bracket, right (R) rear (short), for a shelf-based switch
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Table 97
Custom-made cable assemblies
Order code
Part description
not applicable
alarm/BITS cables to J3 or J4 from site source except for

E1 unbalanced in the table Prefabricated cable
assemblies (page 374)
not applicable
any fiber optic cable with SC connectors
Note: See also Prefabricated cable assemblies (page 374).
Table 98
Prefabricated cable assemblies
Order code
Part description
not
applicable
for CP or FP faceplate cables, see the table CP and FP

signalling cable assemblies and mounting equipment
(page 373)
A0834149
power-and-ground cable assembly, ETSI
A0834143
power-and-ground cable assembly, polyvalent
P0940531
external alarm cable assembly between BIP J2 and MFA150

controller card TB2
(Sheet 1 of 2)
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Prefabricated cable assemblies
Order code
Part description
NTHR75
alarm/BITS cables for E1 unbalanced to J3 or J4 from site

source
NTHR55
alarm/BITS to J2 on lower shelf and Alarm on lower cooling

unit and to J2 on upper shelf and Alarm on upper cooling unit
NTHR56
alarm/BITS to J1 on lower shelf and P7 on the BIP
NTHR57
cooling unit alarm cable assembly, lower or upper
NTHR66
cooling unit power cable assembly, lower or upper
NTHR54
power interface module (PIM) cable assembly to the lower

shelf
NTPN81
kit to convert NTPN13 to an E1 unbalanced version, includes

cable assembly and balun adapter 460
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Table 99
Spare parts kit NTQS29AA for a Passport 15000
Order code
Part description
A0778937
air filter, medium arrestance @ 25 ppi
A0758423
fan assembly, upper or lower, any position
NTHR10AA
fan controller
NT6C60PA
breaker interface module (BIM), 20-amp, for BIP NT6C61

or NT6C62
NT6C60PB
alarm module for BIP NT6C61 or NT6C62
NTHR15
power interface module (PIM)
NPS50332-1
wrist strap with velcro and 10 feet of coiled cord
5.2S2

Table 100
Spare parts kit NTQS29AB for a Passport 15000
Order code
Part description
A0778937
A0522179
fan assembly, upper or lower, middle position
A0522182
fan assembly, upper or lower, side (end) position
NTHR10AB
fan controller
NT6C60PA
breaker interface module (BIM), 20-amp, for BIP NT6C61

or NT6C62
NT6C60PB
alarm module for BIP NT6C61 or NT6C62
NTHR15
NPS50332-1
wrist strap with velcro and 10 feet of coiled cord
Table 101
Spare parts kit NTQH29AA for a Passport 20000
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Order code
Part description
A0778937
A07548423
NTHR10AA
fan controller
NT6C67PA
breaker interface module (BIM), 25-amp, for BIP AP6C67

or AP6C68
NT6C60PB
alarm module for BIP AP6C67 or AP6C68
NTPN15AA
WS1A2C10B1
wrist strap

Table 102
Spare parts kit NTQH29AB for a Passport 20000
Order code
Part description
A0778937
A07548423
NTHR10AA
fan controller
NT6C67PA

or AP6C68
NT6C60PB
NTPN15AA
NTPN81AA
cable assembly for BITS unbalanced E1 for NTPN13
WS1A2C10B1
wrist strap
Table 103
Spare parts kit NTQH29AC for a Passport 20000
Order code
Part description
A0778937
A0522182
A0522179
NTHR10AB
fan controller
NT6C67PA

or AP6C68
NT6C60PB
NTPN15AA
NTPN11AA
MAC address module
WS1A2C10B1
wrist strap
5.2S2

Table 104
Spare parts kit NTQH29AD for a Passport 20000
Order code
Part description
A0778937
A0522182
A0522179
NTHR10AB
fan controller
NT6C67PA

or AP6C68
NT6C60PB
NTPN15AA
NTPN11AA
MAC address module
NTPN81AA
cable assembly for BITS unbalanced E1 for NTPN13
WS1A2C10B1
wrist strap
Table 105
Cooling unit parts for the AA versions
Order code
Part description
A0778937
air filter, medium arrestance
NTHR51AA
cooling unit, lower (rear)
NTHR52AA
cooling unit, upper (front)
A0758423
fan assembly for an NTHR51AA or NTHR52AA, any

position
NTHR10AA
fan controller
NTCC8938
(or A0647397)
temperature sensor assembly, upper or lower cooling unit

(Rotron Maltese 24 V dc)
(Sheet 1 of 2)
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Cooling unit parts for the AA versions
Order code
Part description
NTHR68AA
temperature sensor bracket assembly used with an

NTHR52AA
Note: See also the table Spare parts kit NTQS29AA for a Passport 15000
(page 375).
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Table 106
Cooling unit parts for the AB versions
Order code
Part description
A0778937
air filter, medium arrestance
NTHR51AB
cooling unit, lower (rear)
NTHR52AB
cooling unit, upper (front in a NEBS 2000 frame or 23-inch

EIA rack)
A0522179
fan assembly for NTHR51AB or NTHR52AB, middle

position only (Dyna Ace 24 V dc)
A0522182
fan assembly for NTHR51AB or NTHR52AB, either side

(end) position (Dyna Ace 24 V dc)
NTHR10AB
fan controller
NTHR68AB
temperature sensor bracket assembly used with

NTHR52AB
A0521944
temperature sensor assembly for an NTHR68AB or an

NTHR51AB
A0521940
temperature sensor on an NTHR10AB in an NTHR51AB
Note: Note: See also the table Spare parts kit NTQS29AB for a
Passport 15000 (page 376).
5.2S2

Table 107
BIP parts for a Passport 15000
Order code
Part description
NT6C62
breaker interface panel (BIP) with two 20-amp BIMs
NT6C61
breaker interface panel (BIP) with four 20-amp BIMs
NT6C60PB
BIP alarm module
NT6C60PA
BIP breaker interface module (BIM) with 20-amp breakers;

also referred to as a breaker module
NTHR15
power interface module (PIM) in shelf assembly
Note: See also these tables:

all those in FRUs for an MFA150 system of ac rectifiers (page 385)
Table 108
BIP parts for a Passport 20000
Order code
Part description
AP6C68
breaker interface panel (BIP) with two 25-amp breaker

interface modules (BIMs)
AP6C67AA
breaker interface panel (BIP) with four 25-amp breaker

interface modules (BIMs)
NT6C60PB
BIP alarm module
AP6C67PA
BIP breaker interface module (BIM) with 25-amp breakers;

also referred to as a breaker module
NTPN15
power interface module (PIM) in shelf assembly
Note: See also the tables in FRUs for an MFA150 system of ac rectifiers
(page 385).
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Table 109
Frame accessories and other filler hardware
Order code
Part description
P0887704
BIM filler for a BIP
NTHR64
blank processor card for a shelf assembly to replace an FP;

also referred to as a filler module, especially for ordering
NTRU0120
cable cover kit
NTRU0366
cable cover kit (front or rear panel kit used with extended
cable management brackets)
NTQS37AA
door extension kit for a NEBS 2000 frame (NTPX4060)

door mounting hardware kit (NTRU0192)
two vented lockable doors (each NTRU0423)
NTQS37AB
door extension kit for a NEBS 2000 frame (NTPX4060)

door mounting hardware kit (NTRU0192)
two vented lockable doors (each NTRU0423)
top cover illuminated brandline upgrade (NTPN53AA)
NTRU04
frame, NEBS 2000
NTRU0365
frame spacer brackets kit
NTRU0370
frame spacer junction kit
NTRU0128
side panel kit, regular size
NTPX4050
side panel kit, extended size
NTRU0185
top frame bracket
NTHW51
top cover (panel) kit, brandlining (has words)
NTHW53
top cover (panel) kit, brandlining with illuminating LED
NTHR76
shelf filler panel kit, front of frame, 1000 mm or 3.3 feet
NTHR77
shelf filler panel kit, rear of frame, 800 mm or 2.6 feet
5.2S2

Table 110
Shelf assemblies for a Passport 15000
Order code
Part description
NTHR50
shelf assembly
NTHW99
shelf assembly with these plug-ins included:

NTHR11, the MAC address module
NTHR12, NTHR13, or NTHR14, the alarm/BITS module
NTHR15, the power interface module (PIM)
Table 111
Shelf assemblies for a Passport 20000
Order code
Part description
NTPN70
shelf assembly
NTPN77
shelf assembly with these plug-ins included:

NTPN11, the MAC address module
NTPN12 or NTPN13, the alarm/BITS module
NTPN15, the power interface module (PIM)
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Table 112
Order code
Part description
NTHR11
MAC address module
Note: When a MAC address module must be replaced, it

changes the unique hard-coded node number of the
Passport 15000. Therefore the entire shelf must be reconfigured in software. Ensure that you are familiar with the
task flow in 241-1501-240 Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware
Installation, Maintenance and Upgrade for MAC address
module replacement.
NTHR12
alarm/BITS module for balanced DS1 (shielded twisted pair)
NTHR13
alarm/BITS module for balanced E1 (shielded twisted pair)
NTHR14
alarm/BITS module for unbalanced E1 (coax)
NTHR16
fabric card
Table 113
Order code
Part description
NTPN11
MAC address module
NTPN12
alarm/BITS module for balanced DS1 (shielded twisted pair)
NTPN13
alarm/BITS module for balanced E1 (shielded twisted pair) or

unbalanced E1 with kit NTPN81
NTPN02
70 Gbit/s fabric card
5.2S2

Table 114
All other plug-in or screw-on parts for a Passport 15000 or 20000
Order code
Part description
NTHW85
adaptor bracket kit for mounting a Shasta 5000 into a NEBS

2000 frame
NTRU0325
zone 2 anchor kit for a frame
NTRU0327
zone 4 anchor kit for a frame
NTHR78
junction box kit
A0378999
wrist strap, antistatic
Table 115
Interface cables for interworking between an EdgeLink 100 and a Passport 15000 or 20000
Type
Part number Length
EdgeLink
other end
DS1
A0718801
1.5 m (5 ft)

RJ48 termination
or wirewrap
DS1
A0718802
4.6 m (15 ft)

RJ48 termination
or wirewrap
DS1
A0718803
9.1 m (30 ft)

RJ48 termination
or wirewrap
DS1
A0718779
1.5 m (5 ft)

Amphenol/Cinch to wirewrap
wirewrap at RJ48
termination
DS1
A0718780
7.6 m (25 ft)

wirewrap at RJ48
termination
DS1
A0718781
15.2 m (50 ft)

wirewrap at RJ48
termination
DS3
NTFP19AC
1 m (3.2 ft)
male BNC
male BNC on a DS3 FP
DS3
NTFP19AA
3 m (9.8 ft)
male BNC
DS3
NTFP19AB
15 m (48.2 ft)
male BNC
241-1501-200 5.2S2
FRUs for an MFA150 system of ac rectifiers

The following tables list the field replaceable units (FRUs) for an MFA150
system of ac rectifiers to power a Passport 15000 or 20000:
Relay racks for an MFA150 power system (page 385)
Isolation kits for an MFA150 power system (page 386)
Cables and lugs per ac circuit breaker for an MFA150 power system
(page 386)
Spare and repair parts for an MFA150 power system (page 387)
Circuit breakers on the controller of an MFA150 (page 387)
Table 116
Relay racks for an MFA150 power system
Order code
Description
NT6C40CH
214 cm (7 ft) by 59 cm (23 in) standard (199 cm (78 in) MTG)

with floor anchoring kit
NT6C40CF
122 cm (4 ft) by 59 cm (23 in), seismic zone 4 free standing

(107 cm (42 in) MTG), with floor anchoring kit
NT6C40DE
214 cm (7 ft) by 59 cm (23 in) seismic zone 4 free standing/

flush mount (199 cm (78 in) MTG) with floor anchoring kit
NT6C40BF
214 cm (7 ft) by 59 cm (23 in) seismic E/W bracing (199 cm

(78 in) MTG) with floor anchoring kit and overhead or wall
rack bracing kit
NT6C43BB
64 cm (25 in) by 59 cm (23 in) wall mounted framework

(56 cm (22 in) MTG)
Note: The wall mount enclosure is 54 cm (21 in) deep by

64 cm (25 in) high and provides only 54 cm (21 in) of
mounting space.
5.2S2

Table 117
Isolation kits for an MFA150 power system
Order code
Description
P0729926
Isolation kit for relay rack NT6C40CH
P0736042
Isolation kit for relay rack NT6C40BF
P0744873
Isolation kit for seismic free-standing racks
Table 118
Cables and lugs per ac circuit breaker for an MFA150 power system
Circuit
breaker
Distance
Cable size Lug on the Cable
between the
controller part
controller
number
and BIP
30 A
25 m (75 ft)
6 AWG dc
cable
A0315080
R0118718 A0381005
60 A
11 m (35 ft)
6 AWG dc
cable
A0315080
R0118718 A0381005
17 m (55 ft)
4 AWG dc
cable
A0355545
R0118733 A0686331
27 m (90 ft)
2 AWG dc
cable
A0360815
R0118734 A0698478
17 m (55 ft)
2 AWG dc
cable
A0360815
R0118734 A0698478
100 A
Lug on
the BIP
Note: Each lug on the BIP must be 2-hole, 90-degree offset, with narrow
tongue to fit under the insulation boot.
241-1501-200 5.2S2

Table 119
Spare and repair parts for an MFA150 power system
Order code
Description
A0614339
RC sense fuse (1-1/3A) for the ALL NT6C28 panel
P0834732
Air filter kit for the Helios rectifier 25/48
NT6C14PF
Alarm circuit pack for NT6C28CP panel
NT6C14PG
Meter circuit pack for NT6C28CP panel
P0710139
Fan assembly for Helios rectifier 25/48
P0710139
Helios rectifier 25/48
B0257258
Rectifier shelf kit
B0257267
Control and distribution panel
Table 120
Circuit breakers on the controller of an MFA150
Current rating
(Amperes)
Mid-trip version
30
P0743232
60
P0878236
100
P0878240
5.2S2
241-1501-200 5.2S2
Passport 15000, 20000
Release 5.2
Copyright 2004 Nortel Networks.
All Rights Reserved.
NORTEL NETWORKS, the globemark design, the NORTEL
NETWORKS corporate logo, DMS, and Passport are trademarks of
Nortel Networks.
ADC is a registered trademark of ADC Telecommunications, Inc.
AMP, MATE-N-LOK, and Z-PACK are trademarks of Tyco
Electronics of Canada, Ltd..
Astec, Helios, MFA150, and Advanced Power Systems are
trademarks of Astec Advanced power Systems.
VT100 is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
Publication: 241-1501-200
Document status: Standard
Document version: 5.2S2
Document date: Februrary 2004
Printed in Canada

15 200 52s2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

15 200 52s2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

15 200 52s2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the document about?

What is the document about?

What hardware components are described?

What hardware components are described?

Passport 15000, 20000

Passport 15000, 20000

Copyright 2004 Nortel Networks.

Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Description

Who should read this document and why 27

Passport 15000 overview 37

Passport 15000 or 20000 equipment status 48

Cooling unit LED indications 134

Connecting a Passport to another node 142

4-port DS3Ch FP with AAL1 CES 180

Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Description

Cable assemblies for an NTHW21 229

Voice services processor 3 (VSP3) FP 274

Basic functionality and operation of a sparing panel 292

Managing power cables 315

Managing telecom cables 315

Turning off the audible alarm 366

FRUs that plug into or get screwed onto a Passport 15000 or

Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Description

Two Passport 15000 switches or two Passport 20000

Faceplate of an alarm/BITS module in a

Labels of mini-coax and BNC cable connections on a

Faceplate of a VPN extender card with PEC

Location of the common CP or FP card status

Circuit breaker configuration for each BIM of a

Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Description

Mapping an 8W8 and BNC cable to a termination panel

General interface characteristics for an NTHW31 236

1-port STM-1 FP general interface characteristics 267

Shelf assemblies for a Passport 15000 382

Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Description

About this document

Who should read this document and why (page 27)

What you need to know (page 27)

Whats new in this document (page 28)

Related documents (page 34)

How to get more help (page 35)

Who should read this document and why

hardware maintenance personnel

hardware installation personnel

What you need to know

Passport 15000, 20000 Hardware Description

About this document

Only information specific to the Passport 15000 or 20000 hardware is

Passport 15000 is a class A product. In a domestic

Whats new in this document

Structural changes (page 31)

16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FP with PEC NTHW44

Voice services processor 3 with optical TDM interface

Y-protection for dual 16-port OC-3/STM-1 POS and ATM FPs

Other changes made to this document include the following:

changed the requirements for matching BIMs to a BIP version in

added the direction of airflow in a shelf-based Passport 15000 or 20000

About this document 29

in 100BaseT Ethernet cable assembly (page 204) added note